40 Towne Center Cir - 95-002868 (1995) (STEAK N SHAKE) (NEW RESTURANT) DOCUMENTSyo Two C&V& LS /C h,4 tL j
ZONE
CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
DATE v 60 1 qs- -
Li n /+r. (n -7E;
PHONE # 90Y "' AO-/, "
LOCATION ,IIAWw4
i
ADDRESS
PHONE # I V U
PLUMBING CONTRACTOR \- -
ADDRESS
SUBDIVISION: ffaL;--
PERMIT #CL c _
JOB nf. -
COST
FEE $
STATE NO. l eC-6-34a3 (-O
FEE $ O
PHONE #
qS--3 Q la ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FEE $)(,
y
ADDRESS
PHONE #
MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR - &26 4 FEE $
ADDRESS
PHONE #
MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
SEPTIC TANK PERMIT NO.
SOIL TEST REQUIREMENTS
FINISHED FLOOR
ELEVATION REQUIREMENTS (
ARCH"' .;TURAL APPROVAL DATE:
LOT NO.
BLOCK:
SECTION:
SQUARE FEET: 4(0 0
MODEL:
Q
OCCUPANCY CLASS:
INSPECTIONS ITYPEDATEOKREJECTBY
FEE $ ENERGY SECT. EPI:
q5 - &j -,(
I
CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY
ISSUED #
s1/
DATE:
FINAL DATE /
OWNER:
ADDRESS:
DATE: kk . " 1 • q S
REASON FOR DISAPPROVAL:
CONDITIONAL AGREEMENT:
FIRE DEPARTMENT
PUBLIC WORKS
64
UTILITIES
ENGINEERI j--)(.ft
co
FIGURE N-14
HANDICAP SIGN AND PARKING SPACE STANDARDS
4" J 2" L 4^ 4" -' z" 4
FIGURE H-15
PASSENGER LOADING ZONES
20' MIN.
r--
Ell
WHITE
2r O.C.
OF SANp090 City of Sanford, Florida HANDICAP SIGNIPARKING AND FIGURES
N14 &
Dept. of Engineering PASSENGER LOADING ZONES N-15
and Plannings
tiote co`'
s
I_ 12"
250 FINE
CITY ORD. 3211
NOTES
1. ALL LETTERS ARE 1' SERIES 'C', PER TCD.
2. TOP PORTION OF SIGN SHALL HAVE REFLECTORIZED (ENGINEERING
GRADE BLUE BACKGROUND WITH WHITE REFLECTORIZED LEGENDANDBRDER.
3. BOTTOM PORTION OF SIGN SHALL HAVE A REFLECTORIZED (ENGINEERINGGRADE) WHITE BACKGROUND WITH BLACK OPAQUE LEGEND & BORDER.
4. FINE NOTIFICATION SIGN SHALL HAVE A REFLECTORIZED (ENGINEERINGGRADE) WHITE BACKGROUND WITH BLACK OPAQUE LEGEND $ BORDER. 5. ONE(1) SIGN REQUIRED FOR EACH PARKING SPACE.
6. INSTALLATION HEIGHT OF SIGN SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 24-23 OF THE MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MUTCD).
a+
F SgyFOgp City of Sanford, Florida
w4 Dept. of Engineering
and PlanningoFCOO
FL A. D. 0. T. APPROVED)
HANDICAP
PARKING SIGNAjnGE'
DATE STARTED:— 11_16_q5
CITY OF SANFORD. FLORIDA
Request for Final Inspection for*.
Certificate of Occupancy
ADDRESS: 4Q //Y r _&4L_ 6,A,
The Building Department has prepared a certificate of occupancy for
the above location and is requesting a final inspection by your
department.
After your inspection, please come to the Building Department to
sign -off on the Certificate of Occupancy, or submit a certificate
of occupancy addendum if it has been denied.
Your prompt attention will be appreciated. Thank you.
0
DISTRIBUTION: Engineering Department
Fire
lic Works
rUtilities/Cross Connection
Zoning
DATE STARTED: ff l Q - 95
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
Request for Final Inspection for'. d
Certificate Of Occupancy
ADDRESS: 216 A l6,
The Building Department has prepared a certificate of occupancy for
the above location and is requesting a final inspection by yourdepartment.
After your inspection, please come to the Building Department tojsign -off on the Certificate of Occupancy, or submit a certificate
of occupancy addendum if it has been denied.
Your prompt attention will be appreciated. Thank you.
0
DISTRIBUTION: Engineering Department
Fire
public Works
Utilities/Cross Connection
Zoning
l
DATE STARTED: // —/& '-
CITY OF SANFORD. FLORIDA
Requbst for Final Inspection for*.
Rerificate lzf Occupancy
ADDRESS:.
The Building Department has prepared a certificate of occupancy for
the above location and is requesting a final inspection by yourdepartment.
After your inspection, please come to the Building Department to
sign -off on the Certificate of Occupancy, or submit a certificate
of occupancy addendum if it has been denied.
Your prompt attention will be appi-eciated.
DISTRIBUTION: Engineering Department
Fire
Public Works
Utilities/Cross Connection
96-ning
1
C9w 321\
J
Thank you.
3c- . `
DATE STARTED:
CITY OF SANFORD. FLORIDA
Requ'esf for Final Inspection for.
Rertific.ate Of Occupancy
ADDRESS:.
The Building Department has prepared a certificate of occupancy for
the above location and is requesting a f inal inspection by yourdepartment.
After your inspection, please come to the Building Department to
sign -off on the Certificate of Occupancy, or submit a certificate
of occupancy addendum if it has been denied.
Your prompt attention will be appreciated. Thank you.
I
DISTRIBUTION: v-' gineering Department'
C P4/
Fire
Public Works
Utilities/Cross Connection
Zoning
0
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
PERMIT NO. lL I ' DATE 10 a
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE
FOLLOWING H.A.R.V. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
OWNER'S NAME SJeL ,K 0 s(nr,„k.e-
ADDRESS OF JOB l7u, a771
MECHANICAL CONTR. " i ti IUIGkr,,e r-'
RESIDENTIAL COMMERCIAL
Subject to rules and regulations of Sanford mechanical code.
NATURE OF WORK
I Number II AMOUNT
FUEL
B.T.U. INPUT OUTPUT I II "v
VALUATION
APPLICATION FEE
Master Mechanical
COMPETENCY CARD NO.
CITY OF SANFORD
FIRE -DEPARTMENT
FEES FOR SERVICES
PHONE #: 407-322-4952
DATE: %U q PERMIT #:
BUSINESS NAME:
ADDRESS:,j,o,
PHONE NUMBER:( )
PLANS REVIEW
BURN PERMIT
TANK PERMIT
COMMENTS:
AMOUNT
TENT PERMIT
REINSPECTION
FIRE SYSTEM
G
Q 9
S % .+—•
Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department,,300 N.
Park Avenue, Sanford, Florida. Phone # 330-5656.
Proof of payment must be made to Sanford Fire Prevention
befare any further services can take place.
I certify that the above
information is true and
correct and that I will
comply with all applicable
codes nd r nan es of the
C' y S of d, lorida.
Q
Sanford i e Prevention ApplicaInts Signature
STAIR OF FLOIIIUA
FH02021
OFFICE 01: 1111_ASUI1C11
DEPA111 MEN r 01- INSUI IANCE ]
1ALLAIIASl3EE. FL0III0A '
F.11t1; E11MPTHE Ir DEALCH LICEHUI--
1 ;>
1111S CEATIFII_5 r11Ar1 "ASTE11 POUT CpnP/UIIA/FIUEMAS1En/"CKjNNIE
PH04 Cf.)I1111N1= !.)It
LANUU. FL 32t10J •
UUALIFIE?: MCKINNIEpJ1:1'V"EY
11ns CUFIIR.11'0 wtrlt sl (iT°111F1 ('33*0011 FlAIDA 9TA7urESv AND "AS UIIALirlru runt TIIRTYPEANDCLASSSIIUWMIll:ltlall•11 ' -
T0 Sr. HVICE , IIEPAIR i I NSrALL. Ult INSPECT ALL TYPES OF I'itL-C.PI(i1Nf:E11EU fill(; I:XTIN(llll!c11JHU SYSTEMS. E
PAW.
V. q l U 1 '!5 U7 U Il'1 G U(1J!iUt1 U:1I19 !i!i<iUl::ltlUUJ 1 7.!;. (IU
1 '
r11EASUnEi1
y' IllsunnttcE coMMlsslollril
19SIIE UAIF Irrc CI A99 rnu.• vc° ry^'- o.. ( ni'i•iii:niiuii 0 InKEB 91EEA I',EI eA UAI I I 1111E MAIISIIAL We
k r;
i:
Yt '
I:;: Q• •' FAM
a -
Not QW
r
ti#
f • :r : •:: ; •::: law
4•Y,i ! C J J yy::::•
A
reMaster
MASTER PROTECTION CORPORATION
2804 Corrine Dr. , Orlando. FL 32803 • (407) 894-1671 • FAX (407) 898-9717
Mojo-
October 24, 1995
C C)
City of Sanford S-(Qa Ks Q
P.O. Box 1788 `
Sanford, Florida 32772
RE: Steak N Shake 40 Town Center Sanford, Florida 32772
Dear Sir/Madame:
Please use this letter as authorization for our employees listed below
to pick up, drop off or pay for permits or plans.
Chris Kessler
Thank you,
f McKinnie
FireMaster
M250-430-60-247
8580 Ft. Thomas way
Orlando, Florida 32822
Sworn and subscribed before me this
1995.
My commission expires:
day of 646L( c_ ,
4" Me-lllt—" a
Notary Public
R. MICHAEL KNEARi `"' •` ;'
Notary Pubfic, State of Florida
My Comm. expires MAY 9, 1998
No. CC372166
F1326
J
JULY 27, 1995
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:
A Consolidated Products Company
steak h Shake*, Inc.
SUBJECT: STEAK 'N SHAKE - MERRITT ISLAND, FL
2990 West 71st Street
Indianapolis. IN 46268
317) 293-5350
The following company will be installing fire suppression systems
in our exhaust hoods at the above subject project:
FireMaster
2804 Corrine Drive
Orlando, FL 32803
CONTACT: Lorraine Johnson
407) 894-1671
We are authorizing them to acquire required permits in our behalf.
Should you have any questions, or need any additional information,
please don't hesitate to contact us.
Thank you.
Sincerely,
Andy Burtner
Construction Project Manager
AB/1
Employers Self Insurers Fund
P.O. Omwer 988 • Lake!anc, PL 33802-0988 • Te'epnone (813) 665-6060 or t-800-232-7648 (lerida) _ PAX (8t3) 666-1958
CERTI?ICATE 01' INSURANCE
ISSUED TO: City of Sanford
P.O. Box 1788
Sanford, Florida 32772
This Is to certify that Master Protecti.on Carp. dba Firemaster; Master
Protection Corp. dba Fire-::aster/Fountain ?ire 3aulnment
520 Broadway 0650, Santa Monica, CA 90401
being subject to the provisions of the Florida 'Workers' Compensation Act,
has secured the payment of the c=pensat:ion by 1.sur'_ng their risk with the
Employers Self Insurers Fund
COVERAGE NUMBER: 0830-09086
ZFFECTTVE DATE: Aaril 1, 1995 _
EXPIRATION DATr: Aaril 1, 1996 _
PZMARKS :
Statutory -state of Florida
Znployers Liability
300,000 (Each accident)
S00,000 (Disease -Each Employee)
S500,000 (Disease -policy Limit)
This certificate is not a policy and of itself does not afford any insurance.
Nothing contained in this certificate a)iall be construed as extending coverage
not afforded by the policy shown above or as affording insurance to any
insured not named above.
1014C ` August 25, 1995
Summit Consulting, inc., Administrator Date
Employers Self Insurers Fund
a 1/06/95
24'
Hood i 2
FRONT VIEW
t5 MO Rom+ pDn 15 M-F.R ,/DW BYM t5 DUirP SiAitON
0= SLgja Atifp 14* arm StRFIC-' ME&- ){ coat S1JRrrci ARU
1YWfA^1lR WYAICACU' E.: FR"MER "AOU E- R W MER
41CO I: I Clil- I
1AlxCL' rru t-u
I
40' 23
1/4' 7'
x7" 20 1/4" COLLAR
l
16 lf4" 7
3/4' 8
1/2 8"
DIA. r 20` '
I
4 3/8' 1.D. 4
o Q 2{
TOP
VIEW Road
B2 Aran_
R102 g C& —' c Aasn1
FaC2 3 Ga—' '; 1
S=1" on Haod Ste^
onIRood #2 Systems
installed are Ansul R102 3/3 Gallon Fire Suppression
Systems UL 300 Standa=- flood #
2 Ansul
R102 3 Gallon 1-
2w nozzle Duct 1-
1 N nozzle Plenum 2-
245 nozzle :--vers Svstem
Dti'_izes 7 _low Points opossible_ r.-- a- __
a-cces a= a -c,as ZZ--- down.UDc- i F--
j s1 SV.
I rc_. 5, S _T.. beaC _L,,_G^(1_ •..Zy L . z-- f2-
t. a._ __-_ s ..-- d. -l'. UZc:Y Sys tam ac ._:r-a v a K'-..
G U sea:. c . S vs
7emy_:^S -.a-! _s K•=cz z N-Dt S c c
a-; _c - COe= Fire Protection special
Fim EgL - Saim
uld Sovica t0qEAR sion O^
ar'
WA 2&X Coer+
e Dare OnWWCLF F= c
caon
as e4n7 Steak N Shake
40 Town Center
Sanford,F1. 32771
4M aW-
jM
Hood 11 6" u4 318' I.D.
36 (-41L • ?
A' GKIS 2C CFMLr
CODQt Af3i6 AAEk 36 27 5/6 00"C k: AtrFk24 is,Co"C NE/Q Aim IF
1UMYAC llE HOBOM WMjACttiE HOW
N0771 IDCATU&
35 I/7
S+OW AN;LE
24 23 I/7
iOP VIEW
Hood #1
Ansul R102 3 Gallon
1-2W nozzle Duct
1-1N nozzle Plenum
3-290 nozzle Grills
System Utilizes 9 Flow Points of 11 possible.
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Plying Roquiremerns — 3.0 Gallon System
Th: za;wV , iiia z= ei me first drancn
fine and the start df the last branch h- must not exceed
24 ft. (7.3 m). When the suotiy line is split. the combined
taltoof bom Rigs of the simoy line (tram me start of true first
brenen line to me star of the last branch fine) must not exceed
24 K (7.3 m). See Figure 74. 2.
The total length of all branch fines must not exceed 36 tL 10.
9 rn. Sae Figure 74. 3.
Use a 318 in. union to oonnedt the tank adaptor to the 318 in.
supply fine. 4.
A maximum of two nrmRis ere allowed per duet b. at fine. 5.
The reouiremems of the foliowtng table must not be exceeded:
DuG
Plenum Appliance Reouiremsnat
Su=ty Una Branch Una Branch Line Branch Line Pipe
size 318 in. 3/8 in. 318 in. 318 in. Maximum
Length 40 R 8 It. a tL 12 IL 122
m) (2.4 m) 12 m) 3.7 m) Maximum
Rise 6 tL 4 It. 2 K 2 tL 1.
8 m) (12 in) 6 in) 6 in) Maximum
90• 9 4 Elbows
a
6 Maximum
Tees 1 2 1 a Maximum
Flow 11 • a 2 4 Numbers
ilww.
i 1. 1 td ty. ww. w rye w. rq . m4 11 A w 111 2w oC .etL6 Iw It) VDI waasc wmwl. w, wl nl IM an.1 o s
tt ltv. ws. w w.c t.
w w lw w wr a.e e. owe w
Annul R-102
Restaurant
System (Standard
UL 300 Listed)
Training Program
Design,
Installation, Recharge
and Maintenance
Manual f
Taw`; ] •IPA; j• `'
This manual is intended for use with Ansul R-102 Restaurant
Fire Suppression Systems.
Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire sup-
pression systems should read this entire manual. Specific sec-
tions will be of particular interest depending upon one's
responsibilities.
Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. They need
periodic care. Maintenance is a vital step in the performance
of your fire suppression system. As such it must be performed
in accordance with NFPA 96 (Standard for the Installation of
Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors
from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A (Standard
on Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems) by an authorized Ansul
distributor. To provide maximum assurance that the fire sup-
pression system will operate effectively and safely, maintenance
must be conducted at six-month intervals, or earlier if the situa-
tion dictates. Twelve-year maintenance must include agent tank
hydrostatic testing.
ANSUL, ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSULEX are registered trademarks.
SECTION
I. GENERAL INFORMATION
DESIGN AND APPLICATION
UL LISTING
DEFINITION OF TERMS
II. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
TOTAL SYSTEM
Single -Tank
Double -Tank
Multiple -Tank
111. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
MECHANICAL)
ANSULAUTOMAN" REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
ELECTRICAL)
TANK -BRACKET ASSEMBLY
TANK -ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET
ASSEMBLY
FOR OEM IN -CABINET USE
ONLY)
GAS CARTRIDGES
NOZZLES
METAL BLOW -OFF CAP
CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY
QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR
COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR
HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR
ASSEMBLY
DETECTORS
PULLEY ELBOWS
PULLEY TEE
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
MANUAL RESET RELAY
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
PRESSURE SWITCHES
REGULATOR TEST KIT
FUSIBLE LINK
BURSTING DISC
PAGES
1-1 — 1-2
1-1
1-1
1-1 — 1-2
2-1 — 2-2
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
3-1 — 3-13
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3 — 3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95
SECTION
IV. SYSTEM DESIGN
NOZZLE PLACEMENT
REQUIREMENTS
Duct Protection
Electrostatic Precipitator
Protection
Plenum Protection
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection —
2-Flow
Split Vat Fryer
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection
2-Flow
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection
3-Flow
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection
3-Flow
Range Protection
Griddle Protection
Chain Broiler Protection
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection
Nieco Broiler with Catalytic
Converter Protection
Upright/Salamander Broiler
Protection
Electric Char -Broiler Protection
Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler
Protection
Lava -Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler
Protection
Natural Charcoal Broiler
Protection
Alternate Ceramic/Natural
Charcoal Char -Broiler Protection
Mesquite Char -Broiler Protection
Wok Protection
Nozzle Application Chart
TANK QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS
System Variations
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT
GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
Actuation Gas Line — 6 Tanks
Maximum
Actuation Gas Line — 10 Tanks
Maximum
Expellant Gas Line
DISTRIBUTION PIPING
REQUIREMENTS
General Piping Requirements
Supply and Branch Line
Identification
1.5 Gallon System
3.0 Gallon System
6.0 Gallon Manifolded System
PAGES
4-1 — 4-41
4-1 — 4-25
4-1 — 4-6
4-6 — 4-7
4-7 — 4-9
4-9 — 4-10
4-10.1
4-10.1 — 4-10.3
4-10.4 — 4-10.5
4-10.5 — 4-11
4-11 — 4-14
4-14.1 — 4-17
4-17 — 4-18
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-24 — 4-25.2
4-26
4-26
4-26 — 4-28
4-26 — 4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28 — 4-34.2
4-28
4-29 — 4-30
4-31 — 4-33
4-34
4-34.1 — 4.34.2
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95
SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES
IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN 6-1 — 6-4
DETECTION SYSTEM 4-35 — 4-36
SERVICE
REQUIREMENTS TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1
Detector Identification 4-35 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1
Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity 4-35 VALVES
Detector Placement Requirements 4-35 — 4-36
TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2
Detection Line Requirements 4-36
VALVES
Fusible Link Selection 4-36
MANUAL PULL STATION 4-37
TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2
REQUIREMENTS TESTING PRESSURE SWITCH 6-3
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 4-37 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6-4
REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 4-37 — 4-38
VII. RECHARGE AND RESETTING 7-1 — 7-4
PROCEDURES
REQUIREMENTS
Approvals 4-38 RECHARGE 7-1 — 7-3
PRESSURE SWITCH 4-38 RESETTING 7-3 — 7-4
REQUIREMENTS Resetting Remote Manual Pull 7-3
ELECTRICAL SWITCH 4-38 — 4-41 Station
REQUIREMENTS Resetting Mechanical Gas 7-3
Shut -Off Valve
V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 — 5-26 Resetting Electrical Switch 7-4
Snap -Action)
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS 5-1 — 5-2.2 Resetting Electrical Gas Shut -Off 7-4
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION 5-3 — 5-6 Valve
AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES Resetting Pressure Switch 7-4
General Piping Requirements 5-3 REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 7-4
Actuation Gas Line 5-3 — 5-4
Expellant Gas Line From 5-5 Vill. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8-1 — 8-7
Regulated Release Assembly SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE 8-1 — 8-3
Expellant Gas Line From 5-5
EXAMINATION
Regulated Actuator Assembly
Actuation Gas Line From 101 5-6 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE 8-4 — 8-7
Remote Release(s) to EXAMINATION
Regulated Actuators
INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION 5-7
IX. APPENDIX 9-1 9-11 —
PIPING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE 9-1 — 9-3
General Piping Requirements 5-7 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX 9-4 — 9-6.2
Piping Installation 5-7
PARTS LISTS 9-7 — 9-10
INSTALLING THE DETECTION 5-8 — 5-17
WARRANTY 9-11
SYSTEM
Installing "Clip -on" Style Linkage 5-8 — 5-12
Scissors" Style Linkage 5-12 — 5-15
Installation
Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 5-15 — 5-17
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5-18 — 5-20
PULL STATION
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS 5-20 — 5-23
VALVE
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS 5-23 — 5-24
VALVE
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-24 — 5-25
SWITCHES
INSTALLING PRESSURE SWITCH 5-26
DESIGN AND APPLICATION
The Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is
designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli-
ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered group of mechan-
ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized
Ansul distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL
AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regu-
lated release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed
within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridges, liquid
agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied
in separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire sup-
pression system arrangement.
The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated
manually through a remote manual pull station. The gas or elec-
trical supply to all protected appliances will be immediately shut
off upon actuation of the system, using appropriate gas shut-
off or electrical shut -down devices.
Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station,
mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and
electrical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-
off. Accessories can be added, such as alarms, warning lights,
etc., to installations where required.
The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area,
the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with
a predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Sup-
pressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking
appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the
hot grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap -like foam on
the surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the
hot grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the
escape of combustible vapors.
Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The
forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid
agent through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire sup-
pression process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in
the plenum and duct after the fire suppression system has been
discharged. The system is UL listed with or without fan operation.
It is also recommended that make up or supply air fans be shut
down upon system actuation. Shutdown of fuel and power to
all appliances located under protected ventilating equipment is
required upon system actuation.
UL LISTING
The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested
and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-
engineered system. These tests require extinguishment of fires
which are initiated in deep fat fryers, griddles, char -broilers,
upright broilers, chain -broilers, filters, plenum chambers, hoods,
and ducts after pre -loading each appliance with a prescribed
amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress to
maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is
actuated.
SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 1-1
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Actuation Gas Line: Piping from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regu-
lated Release Assembly which supplies nitrogen or carbon
dioxide to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple -tank
system actuation.
Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent.
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical):
An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism,
agent tank, expellant gas hose, solenoid, and electric switch
within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to
facilitate component hookups.
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechan-
ical): An assembly which contains the regulated release mech-
anism, agent tank, and expellant gas hose within a metal
enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate com-
ponent hookups.
Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdic-
tion" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for
approving" equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The
phrase "Authority Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad
manner since jurisdictions and "approval" agencies vary as do
their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the
authority having jurisdiction" may be a federal, state, local, or
other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire
marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department,
health department, building official, electrical inspector, or others
having statutory authority. For insurance purposes, an insurance
company representative may be the "authority having jurisdic-
tion." In many circumstances the property owner or his desig-
nated agent assumes the role of the "authority having
jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding
officer or departmental official may be the "authority having
jurisdiction."
Blow -Off Cap: A cap which covers the end of the nozzle tip and
prevents grease from plugging the nozzle orifice.
Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from
the supply line to the nozzle(s).
Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which
eliminates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme
temperature variations.
Cartridge: A sealed, steel pressure vessel containing nitrogen
or carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank.
Cooking Appliance: Includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright
broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char -broilers
electric, lava rock, gas -radiant, or mesquite).
Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre -formed piece of conduit which
can be installed between the Ansul regulated release and the
conduit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and
remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient
manner.
SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 1-2
DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued)
Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector
linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire
suppression system.
Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link.
Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing
agent from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply
or Branch lines.
Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the
transmission of air and vapors which, in addition to the contain-
ment components themselves, may include duct fittings,
plenums, and/or other items or air handling equipment.
Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning
of the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near
the base of the ventilation duct.
Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the
nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release
assembly/regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank.
Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow
capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks
needed to cover a certain group of hazards.
Fusible Links: A form of fixed temperature heat detecting device
employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until
its designed temperature is reached.
Gas Valve: A device used to shut off the gas supply to the
cooking equipment when the system is actuated.
Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release
mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically
unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve
to close upon system actuation.
High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the
nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and
capture grease -laden vapors and exhaust gases. It shall be con-
structed in a manner which meets the requirements of NFPA 96.
Liquid Agent: A potassium -based solution used for the knock-
down and suppression of fire.
Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the
nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum
dimension, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle.
Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit-
tings which must not be exceeded for each system.
Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the
nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required
between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a
griddle, range, or fryer.
Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a
specific flow rate and stream pattern.
Overlapping Protection: When two types of appliances, side
by side, are protected as a common hazard. This protection
requires the maximum hazard size to be limited to the listed size
of the worst hazard.
Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of
the hood above the filters.
Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire
rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and
the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the
mechanical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism
and the remote manual pull station.
Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of iwo wire
ropes which run from the regulated release mechanism to two
remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated release
assemblies to a single mechanical gas valve.
Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains
the regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank, and expellant gas
hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pres-
surize additional agent tanks in a multiple tank system.
Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the
ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases
the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other
devices when signaled automatically by a detector or manually
with a remote pull station.
Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the
nitrogen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is
actuated.
Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual
actuation of the system from a remote location.
Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the
upright broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling
of meats and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most
contain a removable grease drip tray.
Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from
the agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch
lines.
Series Detector: Any detector located in -line between the regu-
lated release assembly and the terminal detector.
Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only
detector used in a single -detector system. This detector is thus
named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends,
or "terminates." There is only one terminal detector per detec-
tion system.
Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows
for the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between
the hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct.
Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within
the agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature
fluctuations.
TOTAL SYSTEM
There are three types of R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression
Systems: -
1. Single -tank System
2. Double -tank System
3. Multiple -tank System
The type of system required for the particular installation will
be determined through the guidelines covered in "System
Design." Additional equipment which may be required to com-
plete the system design is explained in the "System Compo-
nents" section. Additional devices covered are: remote manual
pull stations, mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, elec-
trical switches, and pressure switches.
Single -Tank System
The R-102 single -tank system is available with a stainless steel
enclosure and consists of:
1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
4. Discharge Nozzles
5. Detection Components
6. Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detec-
tion system and additional equipment. Refer to "System Com-
ponents" section for individual component descriptions.
1
SECTION II — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 2-1
Double -Tank System
The R-102 double -tank system is available with a stainless steel
enclosure and consists of:
1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
4. Tank -Enclosure or Tank -Bracket Assembly
5. Discharge Nozzles
6. Detection Components
7. Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expel-
lant piping, detection system, and additional equipment.
The tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is mounted
separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release
assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simulta-
neous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components"
section for individual component descriptions.
FIGURE 2
SECTION 11 — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 2-2
REV. 1
TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued)
Multiple -Tank System
The R-102 multiple -tank system is available with a stainless steel
enclosure and consists of:
1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
2. Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s)
3. Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies)
4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
5. Tank -Enclosure or Tank -Bracket Assembly(ies)
6. Discharge Nozzles
7. Detection Components
8. Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actua-
tion piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional
equipment.
Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actua-
tion/expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous
actuation of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic
actuator, regulator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant
piping.
Each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is mounted
separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release
assembly or regulated actuator assembly expellant gas piping
requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system.
Refer to
nent desci
rnavnr- 13
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon — Part
No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon — Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based
solution designed for fast knock -down and suppression of
grease -related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers
which provide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life
expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch
numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each instal-
lation record.
ANSULEX" LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT
3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON
FIGURE 1
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL)
The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release
Assembly (3.0 gallon — Part No. 79290 or 1.5 gallon — Part
No. 79291) contains the regulated release mechanism, agent
tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure
knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant
piping; detection system; and additional equipment. This regu-
lated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple -
tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The
release mechanism can be used to interconnect both the actu-
ation and expellant gas lines as required per system design. The
regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the
tank at 100 psi (690 kPa) when the system is actuated.
In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel-
lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of
the regulator. In double and multiple -tank system configurations,
the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed
for one additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket hookup. The
enclosure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this con-
nection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator,
additional fittings are required.
The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains
an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc
helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to signifi-
cant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is
located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions,
requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years.
The agent tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with
1.53 gallons (5.8 L) or 3.06 gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX
Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation.
The detection and additional equipment required per system
design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure
contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups.
The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Auto-
matic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection
system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the
system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull
station pull ring.
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-1
ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
MECHANICAL)
AGENT TANI
RELEASE
MECHANISA
ti
I
FIGURE 2
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL)
The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly
3.0 gallon Part No. 79292) is identical to the mechanical ver-
sion except it contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and
electrical switch.
The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release
mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid
by opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired.
Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto-
matic equipment and gas shut-off accessories, as well as
initiating audible and visual alarms.
ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
ELECTRICAL)
AGENT TANK
SWITCH
SOLENOID
FIGURE 3
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-2
TANK -BRACKET ASSEMBLY
The Tank -Bracket Assembly (1.5 gallon — Part No. 78232 or
3.0 gallon — Part No. 78937) consists of an agent storage tank
and mounting bracket. This assembly is used in double and
multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface
near the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator
assembly that its expellant gas line will be connected to.
The tank contains an adaptorttube assembly with a bursting disc.
The bursting disc helps prevent agent leakage due to signifi-
cant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is
located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions,
requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The date of
manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the tank.
The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with 1.53
gallons (5.8 L) or 3.06 gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX Low
pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. The tank bracket
is designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of space.
TANK -BRACKET ASSEMBLY
TANK ADAPTOR/
4SSEMBLY
AGENT
TANK
TANK -ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING BRACKET
FIGURE 4
The Tank -Enclosure Assembly (1.5 gallon — Part No. 78921 or
3.0 gallon — Part No. 78929) consists of an agent storage tank
and mounting enclosure. This assembly is used in double and
multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface
near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly its
expellent gas line will be connected to.
The tank contains an adaptorAube assembly with a bursting disc.
The bursting disc helps prevent agent leakage due to signifi-
cant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is
located. The date of manufacture is stamped on the bottom of
the tank.
The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with 1.53
gallons (5.8 L) or 3.06 gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX Low
pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation.
The tank -enclosure is designed for mounting the tank in a
minimum amount of space.
TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
AGENT TANK
MOUNTING
ENCLOSURE
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
TANK ADAPTOR/
TUBE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5
The Regulated Actuator Assembly (1.5 gallon — Part No. 79137
or 3.0 gallon — Part No. 79327) contains the regulator, pneu-
matic actuator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expel-
lant piping. This assembly is used in multiple -tank systems and
must be mounted to a rigid surface.
The regulator contains two outlets 1350 apart. One outlet is used
to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent
tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an addi-
tional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly. The regulator
is designed to allow a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent
tank connected (two tanks maximum) at 100 psi (690 kPa).
The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant
gas cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated
release assembly actuation piping. The agent tank is shipped
uncharged and must be filled with 1.53 gallons (5.8 L) or 3.06
gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppres-
sant during installation. The tank is mounted and secured within
the enclosure. The enclosure contains a knockout to facilitate
distribution piping hookup.
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
AGENT TANK
PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATOR
FIGURE 6
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM
IN -CABINET USE ONLY)
The OEM Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 79493, contains
the same regulated release mechanism as the standard ANSUL
AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly. This release/bracket
assembly can be installed in the fire cabinet horizontally or ver-
tically. It contains all the necessary mounting and conduit holes
needed to fully install the assembly. The agent tank is installed
separately and need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled.
MOUNTING
RELEASE M' BRACKET
MECHANISM-r
REGULATOR
FIGURE 7
GAS CARTRIDGES
In Single -Tank System arrangements, the 1.5 gallon regulated
release assembly requires an LT-20-R nitrogen cartridge (Part
No. 7032) or a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge (Part No. 15850)
and the 3.0 gallon regulated release assembly requires an
LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 5373) or a 101-20 carbon
dioxide cartridge (Part No. 17492) to properly expel the contents
of a single tank.
In Double -Tank System arrangements (two 3.0 gallon tanks or
one 3.0 gallon tank and one 1.5 gallon tank), the regulated
release assembly requires a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge
Part No. 73022) or a 101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge (Part No.
15851) to properly expel the contents of two tanks simul-
taneously.
In Double -Tank System arrangements (two 1.5 gallon tanks), the
regulated release assembly requires a LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge
Part No. 5373) or a 101-20 carbon dioxide cartridge (Part No.
17492) to properly expel the contents of two tanks simul-
taneously.
In manifolded system arrangements (two 3.0 gallon tanks), if
using a 3.0 gallon regulated release and a 3.0 gallon tank
enclosure, the regulated release requires a "double tank"
nitrogen cartridge, (Part No. 73022). If using a 3.0 gallon regu-
lated actuator and a 3.0 gallon tank enclosure, the regulated
actuator requires either a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part
No. 73022) or an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No.
29187).
In Multiple -Tank System arrangements, cartridge sizes vary
depending on the size of tanks, number of tanks, and arrange-
ment of the actuation and expellant gas piping.
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 3-3
REV. 1
NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES
T 1
7 7/8 IN.
I
20 cm) 11 3/8 IN. 11 3/8 IN. UI 28.9 cm) 29.9 cm)
14 5l8 IN.
37.1 cm)
2112IN.
6.4 Cm) I
2 112 IN
4 3/16 IN.
6.4 cm) 10.6 cm)---
3 9116 IN.
9 Cm)
LT-20-R LT-30-R DOUBLE -TANK LT-A-101.30
CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
PART NO. 7032 PART NO. 5373 PART NO. 73022 PART NO. 29187
CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES
9 IN. 7 718 IN.
22.9 cm) (
20 cm)
11 518 IN.
29.5 cm)
i
2 IN. 2 1/2 IN.I
5.1 cm) (6.4 Cm)
1
2 1/2 IN.
6.4 cm)
101-10 101.20 101.30
CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
PART NO. 15850 PART NO. 17492 PART NO. 15851
FIGURE 8
NOZZLES
There are fifteen types of discharge nozzles each designed to
distribute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the
hazard area:
1. 1 W Nozzle 9. 260 Nozzle
2. 1 N Nozzle 10. 290 Nozzle
3. 1/2N Nozzle 11. 2120 Nozzle
4. 3N Nozzle 12. 1 WS Nozzle
5. 2WH Nozzle 13. 1 NS Nozzle
6. 2W Nozzle 14. 1 NSS Nozzle
7. 230 Nozzle 15. 1 WSS Nozzle
8. 245 Nozzle
In addition, where a regulated actuator assembly is required for Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have cer-
one agent tank, an LT-20-R nitrogen cartridge or a 101-10 carbon
tain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for adioxidecartridge (for 1.5 gallon tank) or an LT-30-R nitrogen car- specific application and must only be used in those areas. tridge or a 101-20 carbon dioxide cartridge (for 3.0 gallon tank)
may be used within the regulated actuator assembly.
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-4
NOZZLES (Continued)
1 W Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56927)
The 1 W nozzle application is for ducts, plenums and overhead
chain broilers. This nozzle consists of four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 1 W (See
Figure 9). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle
and must be counted as one flow number when determining
system design.
5. This nozzle is also available in stainless steel (1 WSS) Part
No. 417333.
1 W NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
BODY
STRAINERW
1
TIP O
1
CAP
1
to
1,
FIGURE 9
IN Nozzle Assembly, (Part No. 56930)
The 1 N nozzle application is for chain broilers, woks, electric
char -broilers, lava rock char -broilers, natural charcoal broilers,
and plenum coverage. This nozzle consists of four basic com-
ponents:
1. ?he blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 1 N (See
Figure 10). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle
and must be counted as one flow number when determining
system design.
5. This nozzle is also available in stainless steel (1 NSS) Part
No. 417332.
Part is common to all nozzle assemblies.
1N NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
1N
BODY
STRAINER
1
TIP
CAP
1
FIGURE 10
1/2N Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56929)
The 1/2N nozzle application is for upright broilers, salamanders,
and electrostatic precipitators. This nozzle consists of four basic
components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 1/2N. (See Figure
11). The (1 /2) indicates that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair
of these nozzles will equal one flow number when deter-
mining system design.
NOTICE
Metal blow -off caps are not allowed with the
1/2N nozzle assembly.
1/2N NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
T10
1/2N
BODY
STRAINER
TIP
CAP
1
Q
4
E
i
FIGURE 11
NOZZLES (Continued)
3N Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 76782)
The 3N nozzle application is for mesquite char -broiler, lava rock
ceramic) and natural charcoal char -broiler protection. This
nozzle consists of three basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The nozzle body' mounting threads are 3/8-18 NPT male
threads.
3. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 3N (See
Figure 12). The (3) indicates that this is a three -flow nozzle
and must be counted as three flow numbers when deter-
mining system design.
3N NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
3N
BODY
STRAIINER
1
TIP + O
1
1
CAP
l
FIGURE 12
2WH Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 78078)
NOTICE
Use 2WH nozzles on 1.5 gallon, 6 flow, duct
and plenum protection only, Option 2.
The 2WH Nozzle is for duct application (using the 1.5 gallon tank
with Option 2 only) and consists of four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease and other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer and contains 3/8-18
NPT male threads.
4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 2WH (See Figure
13). The (2) stamped number indicates that this is a two flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers when
determining system design.
Pan is common to all nozzle assemblies.
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-5
2WH NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
2WH
BODY
STRAINER
4
1
TIP ,
CAP
1
c
FIGURE 13
2W Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56928)
The 2W Nozzle is for duct application (all duct protection except
Option 2, 1.5 gallon system) and consists of four basic
components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease and other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer and contains 3/8-18
NPT male threads.
4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 2W (See Figure
14). The (2) stamped number indicates that this is a two flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers when
determining system design.
2W NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
W BODY
i
STRAINER
TIP I O
CAP
1
00
FIGURE 14
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-6
NOZZLES (Continued)
230 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418117) 245 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
The 230 nozzle application is for fryer/high proximity. This nozzle
consists of four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 230 (See
Figure 15). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle and
must be counted as two flow numbers when determining
system design.
230 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
230
BODY
1
STRAINERTIP1
CAP'
1 -
0
1 0
FIGURE 15
245 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418118)
The 245 nozzle application is for fryer/low proximity, range/high
proximity, and gas -radiant char -broiler. This nozzle consists of
four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 245 (See
Figure 16). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle and
must be counted as two flow numbers when determining
system design.
Part is oommon to all nozzle assemblies.
245
BODY
1
STRAINER
TIP
CAP
FIGURE 16
260 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418119)
The 260 nozzle application is for range/medium proximity, and
griddle/high proximity. This nozzle consists of four basic com-
ponents:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 260 (See
Figure 17). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle and
must be counted as two flow numbers when determining
system design.
260 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
260
BODY
i
STRAINERTIP - O1
OCAP '
1 0
FIGURE 17
NOZZLES (Continued)
290 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418120)
The 290 nozzle application is for range/low proximity, and
griddle/medium proximity. This nozzle consists of four basic
components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 290 (See
Figure 18). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle and
must be counted as two flow numbers when determining
system design.
290 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
290
BODY
1
STRAINIER 1
TIP + O
CAP
l
FIGURE 18
2120 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418121)
The 2120 nozzle application is for griddle/low proximity. This
nozzle consists of four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than
the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening.
3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting
threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT.
4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 2120
See Figure 19). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle
and must be counted as two flow numbers when deter-
mining system design.
Part is common to all nozzle assemblies.
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-7
2120 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
2120
BODY
4
STRAINER
TIP 1 O
CAP
FIGURE 19
1 WS Swivel Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 415567)
The 1 WS nozzle has a swivel tip for ease of installation and
aiming. The swivel nozzle can be used in any application that
the 1 W nozzle is used on. The 1 WS nozzle application is for
ducts, plenums, and overhead chain broilers. This nozzle con-
sists of four basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The nozzle body is chrome -plated and houses an internal
strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18
female NPT.
3. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 1 WS (See
Figure 20). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle
and must be counted as one flow number when determining
system design. The tip can be rotated approximately 340
in any direction from nozzle centerline.
4. The tip retainer is chrome -plated and is necessary to secure
the tip to the nozzle body to lock in the aiming angle.
1 WS NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
1WS BODY
TIP
I8—
CAP d" — -
TIP RETAINER
1
O /
FIGURE 20
I
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-8
NOZZLES (Continued)
INS Swivel Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 415566)
The INS nozzle has a swivel tip for ease of installation and
aiming. The swivel nozzle can be used in any application that
the 1 N nozzle is used on. The 1 NS nozzle application is for chain
broilers, electric char -broiler, lava rock char -broilers, natural char-
coal broilers, and plenum coverage. This nozzle consists of four
basic components:
1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other
substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An
integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the
nozzle.
2. The nozzle body is chrome -plated and houses an internal
strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18
female NPT.
3. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 1 NS (See
Figure 21). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle
and must be counted as one flow number when determining
system design. The tip can be rotated approximately 340
in any direction from nozzle centerline.
4. The tip retainer is chrome -plated and is necessary to secure
the tip to the nozzle body to lock in the aiming angle.
Part is common to all nozzle assemblies.
Nozzle Identification Chart
Nozzle Nozzle Tip Nozzle
Nozzle Type Part No. Stamping Flow No.
1 W Nozzle 56927 1 W 1
1 WSS Nozzle 417333 1 W 1
1 N Nozzle 56930 1 N 1
1 NSS Nozzle 417332 1 N 1
1/2N Nozzle 56929 1/2N 1/2
3N Nozzle 76782 3N 3
2W Nozzle 56928 2W 2
2WH Nozzle 78078 2WH 2
INS Nozzle 415566 INS 1
1 WS Nozzle 415567 1 WS 1
230 Nozzle 418117 230 2
245 Nozzle 418118 245 2
260 Nozzle 418119 260 2
290 Nozzle 418120 290 2
2120 Nozzle 418121 2120 2
INS SWIVEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
INS
BODY
TIP 6
CAP V o
TIP RETAINER
0
Nozzle
Identification
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Stainless Steel Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Stainless Steel Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Brass Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Brass Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Brass Tip
Chrome -Plated Body, Tip Retainer and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body, Tip Retainer and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
Chrome -Plated Body and Tip
FIGURE 21
METAL BLOW -OFF CAP
Two types of metal blow -off caps are available as options to the
standard rubber caps. The metal cap can be used in unusually
high heat conditions, generally over 400° F (204° C). The metal
blow -off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless
steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during
discharge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745 contains 10 metal
blow -off caps for use on standard, non -swivel nozzles and Ship-
ping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow -off caps
for use on swivel nozzles.
NOTICE
If metal blow -off caps are required for upright
broiler protection, use (2) two 1 N nozzles (Part
No. 56930) instead of 1/2N nozzles.
STAINLESS
STEEL WIRE
METAL CAP
FIGURE 22
CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY
The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 79825, is used to change
direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve,
and remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assembly can
only be used in the area where the conduit attaches to the regu-
lated release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly,
the maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed.
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-9
OUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR
The "Ouik-Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting
that produces a liquid -tight seal around both distribution piping
and detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and
ducts. The "Ouik-Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or con-
duit. The adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78195), 3/8
in. (Part No. 77284), 1 /2 in. (Part No. 77286), or 3/4 in. (Part No.
77288) pipe or conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a
conduit connector must be installed in each end of the adaptor.
ADAPTOR BODY
GASKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
FIGURE 24
COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR
This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a
liquid -tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distri-
bution piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods
and ducts. The "Compression -Seal" adaptor is a straight -
through design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or
pipe. The adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No.
79148), 3/8 in. (Part No. 79150), 1/2 in. (Part No. 79146), and
EMT conduit size of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79152).'
COMPRESSION NUT
f
ADAPTOR BODY
GASKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
Wu " FIGURE 25
COUPLING
HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY
This adaptor, shipping assembly Part No. 79768, is a mechan-
CONDUIT ical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid -tight seal around 1/2
OFFSET in. EMT conduit when installing the detection line through res-
taurant hoods and ducts. The adaptor accepts a high tempera-
ture pulley elbow and, when used, correctly positions the elbow
or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in the detector
bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for multiple
CONDUCT
CONNECTOR elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the
detection line.
FIGURE 23 SEAL NUT
SEAL ADAPTOR
WASHERBODYLi111
PULLEY
ELLBOT0)rr__:;
GASKET
NOT PART
OF ASSEMBLY)
FIGURE 26
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-10
DETECTORS
The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket,
linkage, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must
be ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly
to the mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the
fusible link. The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific
temperature and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the
regulated release mechanism.
There are three styles of detectors available: the clip -on style,
the hinged style, and the scissor style.
The clip -on style allows the wire rope to be strung completely
through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the
detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later.
The hinged style detector requires the wire rope to be strung
to the detector bracket, and then "threaded" through the linkage
assembly before continuing to the next detector bracket.
The scissor style allows the wire rope to be strung completely
through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the
detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later.
Each style of detector consists of two types of assemblies:
The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368)
includes a test link and is placed last in a series of detectors.
This detector is sometimes referred to as the end -of -line detector
and is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire
rope "terminates," or is anchored at the detector bracket. Only
one terminal detector is required per detection system.
The Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is
any detector located in -line between the regulated release
assembly and the terminal detector.
When using Part No. 56837 and 56838 style detectors, a total
of 12 detectors can be in one detection system: 11 series
detectors, Part No. 56837 and 1 terminal detector, Part No.
56838.
When using Part No. 15373 and 15375 style detectors, a total
of 5 detectors can be in one detection system: 4 series detectors,
Part No. 15373 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 15375.
When using Part No. 417368 and 417369 style detectors, a total
of 15 detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series
detectors, Part No. 417369 and 1 terminal detector, Part No.
417368.
CLIP -ON STYLE - PART NO. 56837 AND 56838
LINKAGE BRACKET
FUSIBLE
L/INK
f
MINDED STYLE - PART NO. 15373 AND 15375
SCISSOR STYLE - PART NO. 417368 AND 417369
BRACKET
FIGURE 27
PULLEY ELBOWS
There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direc-
tion of the wire rope by 900. Ansul recommends for tempera-
tures not in excess of 700 OF (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has
socket ends with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No.
45771 has compression ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit.
PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 45771
mom
FIGURE 28
PULLEY TEE
The Pulley Tee (Part No. 15342) is used to change the direction
of two wire ropes by 900. It must be used in areas where the
temperatures are within the range of 32 OF to 130 OF (0 °C to
54 °C). Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actua-
tion lines and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees cannot
be used within a detection line. Pulley tees can only be used
to operate one gas valve from two ANSUL AUTOMAN Releases.
FIGURE 29
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal
detector, through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows,
and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any
fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and
the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The
cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote
manual pull stations. The cable is available in 50 ft. (15 m) (Part
No. 15821) and 500 ft. (152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths.
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835, Part No. 54011,
or Part No. 415255) is required for manual actuation of the regu-
lated release assembly. The remote manual pull station should
be mounted at a point of egress and positioned at a height deter-
mined by the authority having jurisdiction.
PART NO. 4835
WITHOUT CABLE)
PART NO. 54011) PART NO. 415255
WITH 50 FT. OF CABLE) (WITHOUT CABLE)
1
METAL STAMPED PLASTIC MOLDED
FIGURE 30
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-11
MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of
gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release
assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1
1/4 in., 1 1/2 in., and 2 in. Ansul style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 in.
Asco style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both
styles are UL Listed.
Maximum
Part Operating
No. Description Pressure
55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa)
55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa)
55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa)
55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa)
55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa)
25937 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa)
25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa)
FIGURE 31
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of
either natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the
regulated release assembly. The valves are available in sizes
of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., and 3 in.. The valve is held open
by an energized solenoid and upon system actuation, the switch
contacts in the regulated release assembly open, thus de -
energizing the circuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve
to close. Valves are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed.
Maximum
Part Operating
No. Description Pressure
13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 2 psi (13.8 kPa)
ASCO)
13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 1 psi (6.9 kPa)
ASCO)
13709 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 25 psi (172 kPa)
ASCO)
13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 25 psi (172 kPa)
ASCO)
17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 5 psi (34.5 kPa)
ASCO)
FIGURE 32
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-12
MANUAL RESET RELAY
The manual reset relay is required when using an electrical gas
valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve has closed,
either due to system actuation or power failure, the valve can
not be re -opened, allowing gas to flow, until the reset relay button
Is manually pressed, re -energizing the circuit. The reset relay
is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay is also recom-
mended for electrical shut down.
I
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
FIGURE 33
The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas
valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are
designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated.
The switches are rated for 15 amp 1 /3 hp, 125 or 250 VAC, with
1/2 amp at 125 VDC and 1/4 amp at 250 VDC. The switches
are available in SPDT (Part No. 15549), DPDT (Part No. 32222),
3PDT (Part No. 415868) and 4PDT (Part No. 32220) models.
FIGURE 34
PRESSURE SWITCHES
The pressure switch is a pneumatically operated electrical switch
intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors,
lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices, and
other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on
when the fire suppression system is actuated. The switches are
rated at 20 amp, 125, 250, or 480 VAC - with 10 amp at 125
VAC "L" 1 hp-115 VAC, 2 hp-230 VAC, 1/2 amp at 125 VDC,
1/4 amp at 250 VDC, and are available in SPDT or DPDT models.
The switch enclosure contains an external reset button for con-
venient resetting.
FIGURE 35
REGULATOR TEST KIT
The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required
to test the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12-year
maintenance examinations. This will ensure that the regulator
is functioning properly.
rnaURE 36
FUSIBLE LINK
In order to determine the normal operating temperature at the
fusible link location, utilize a maximum registering thermometer
Part No. 15240), temperature tape or other accurate
thermometer.
O O
TEMPERATURE RATING
L
STAMPED ON FUSIBLE
OLINK
BODY
CA
K STYLE ML STYLE
500 °F (260 "C) ONLY
FIGURE 37
Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in
detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below:
To Be Used Where
Fusible Link Temperature Temperature Does
Part No. Rating Not Exceed
415739 165 OF 74 °C) 100 OF (38 °C)
415740 212 OF 100 °C) 150 OF (66 °C)
415741 280 OF 138 °C) 225 OF (107 °C)
415742 360 OF 182 °C) 290 OF (143 °C)
415743 450 OF 232 °C) 360 OF (182 °C)
56816 500 OF 260 °C) 400 OF (204 °C)
BURSTING DISC
The R-102 Bursting Disc is installed in the tank adaptor
assembly. The bursting disc eliminates the siphoning of the
agent up the pipe during extreme temperature variations. The
bursting discs are available in packs of 10, Part No. 417911.
5
FIGURE 38
SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 3-13
SYSTEM DESIGN
One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a cor-
rect system design. This section is divided into ten sub -sections:
Nozzle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements,
Actuation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution
Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual
Pull Station Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Require-
ments, Electrical Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch
Requirements, and Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of
these sections must be completed before attempting any instal-
lation. System design sketches should be made of all aspects
of design for reference during installation.
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and
quantity for plenum, duct, and individual appliance protection.
This section must be completed before determining tank quan-
tity and piping requirements.
Duct Protection
The R-102 system uses several different duct nozzles depending
on the size of duct being protected.
1. 1 W Nozzle (Part No. 56927) — 1.5 Gallon and 3.0 Gallon
Systems:
The R-102 systems, both 1.5 gallon and 3.0 gallon, use the
1 W nozzle (Part No. 56927) for duct protection of 27 in. (68.6
cm) perimeter or less or 8.5 in. (21.6 cm) diameter or less.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 W, indicating that this is
a one -flow nozzle and is to be counted as one flow number.
Single Nozzle (One Flow Number) Duct Protection:
One 1 W nozzle (Part No. 56927) will protect ducts with
a maximum perimeter of 27 in. (68.6 cm) or a maximum
diameter of 8.5 in. (21.6 cm). The nozzle must be
installed 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct
opening and positioned as shown in Figure 1.
2-8 IN.
5 — 20 cm)
FIGURE 2
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-1
Single Nozzle (One Flow Number) Transition
Protection:
One 1 W nozzle (Part No. 56927) will protect transitions
where the perimeter of 27 in. (68.6 cm) or the diameter
of 8.5 in. (21.6 cm) or less begins within that transition.
The nozzle must be placed in the center of the transi-
tion opening where the maximum perimeter or diameter
begins as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
DUCT
Al -
MODULE PERIMETER
NOT MORE THAN TRANSITION
27 IN. (68.6 cm)
FIGURE 2
FIGURE 3
NOTICE
A 2WH nozzle must be substituted for a 2W
nozzle for any installation using Option 2 of
the 1.5 gallon system coverage (6 flow duct
and plenum protection only).
2. 2W Nozzle (Part No. 56928):
The R-102 System, uses the 2W nozzle (Part No. 56928)
for duct protection of 75 in. (190.5 cm) perimeter or less,
or 24 in. (61 cm) diameter or less. The nozzle tip is stamped
with 2W, indicating that this is a two -flow nozzle and must
be counted as two flow numbers.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-2
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Duct Protection (Continued)
The 1 W and 2W nozzles will protect the following:
3. Single Nozzle (2W) Duct Protection:
One 2W nozzle will protect ducts with a maximum perim-
eter of 75 in. (190.5 cm) or a maximum diameter of 24 in.
61 cm). The nozzle must be installed 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into
the center of the duct opening and positioned as shown in
Figure 4.
2-8 IN.
5-20 cm)
FIGURE 4
4. Single Nozzle (2W) Transition Protection:
One 2W nozzle will protect transitions at the point where
the perimeter of 75. in. (190.5 cm) or the diameter of 24 in.
61 cm) or less begins within that transition. The nozzle must
be placed in the center of the transition opening where the
maximum perimeter or diameter begins as shown in Figures
5 and 6.
DUCT
I
MODULE PERIMETER
NOT MORE THAN TRANSITION
75.IN. (190.5 cm)
FIGURE 5
MODULE DIAMETER
NOT MORE THAN
24 IN. (61 cm)
DUCT
t TRANSITION
FIGURE 6
5. Dual -Nozzle Duct Protection:
Two 2W nozzles will protect ducts with a maximum perim-
eter of 150 in. (381 cm) or a maximum diameter of 48 in.
122 cm). The nozzles must be installed 2-8 in. (5-20 cm)
into the duct opening and positioned as in Figure 7.
i
i
1/2
DUCT
DUCT
LENGTH
1/4 LENGTH
DUCT
LENGTH
FIGURE 7
NOTICE
In installations where a UL listed damper
assembly is employed, the duct nozzle can be
installed beyond the 8 in. (20 cm) maximum,
to a point just beyond the damper assembly
that will not interfere with the damper.
Exceeding the maximum of 8 in. (20 cm) in
this way will not void the UL listing of the
system.
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Duct Protection (Continued)
6. Dual -Nozzle Transition Protection:
Two 2W nozzles will protect transitions with a maximum
perimeter of 150 in. (381 cm). The transition area must be
divided where two equally sized modules begin within that
transition. The nozzle must be placed in the center of the
transition opening where the maximum module perimeter
begins as shown in Figure 8.
FIGURE 8
7. Dual -Nozzle Duct Protection (3 Flow Numbers):
Rectangular ducts larger than 75 in. (191 cm) perimeter,
up to a maximum of 102 in. (260 cm) perimeter, (diameters
larger than 24 in. (61 cm), up to 32 in. (81 cm) diameter)
can be protected with a combination of one 1 W nozzle (Part
No. 56927) and one 2W nozzle (Part No. 56928). Each
nozzle must be installed on its own duct branch line and
positioned 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct. See
Figure 9.
l
SUPPLY LINE
BRANCH LINE
FIGURE 9
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-3
To correctly locate the nozzles in the duct, the longest side
of the duct must be divided into four equal modules. See
Figure 10.
FIGURE 10
The 1 W nozzle (Part No. 56927) is then centered in one of
the outside modules. See Figure 11.
1W NOZ2
CENTERE[
IN DUCT
IN MODULE
IN MODULE
FIGURE 11
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-4
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Duct Protection (Continued)
7. (Continued)
The 2W nozzle (Part No. 56928) is then centered in the
remaining three modules. See Figure 12.
CENTERED
IN MODULE
DI
OF
R , UUdETER \
1W NOZZLE
Y
CENTERED \
IN DUCT
314 OF
LONGEST SIDE
DIAMETER
2W NOZZLE
CENTERED
IN MODULE
LONGEST SIDE
FIGURE 12
The nozzles must be positioned on the same centerline, par-
allel to the longest side. See Figure 13.
L,.4
PARALLEL TO
LONGEST SIDE
FIGURE 13
8. Triple -Nozzle Duct Protection (5 Flow Numbers):
NOTICE
When protecting the duct with a 1.5 gallon
system using this type of protection, no appli-
ance branch lines are allowed on the 1.5
gallon system.
Rectangular/square ducts larger than 150 in. (381 cm)
perimeter, up to a maximum of 177 in. (450 cm) perimeter,
may be protected with a combination of one 1 W nozzle (Part
No. 56927) and two 2W nozzles (Part No. 56928). Each
nozzle must be installed on its own duct branch line and
positioned 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct. See
Figure 14.
BRANCH LINE
4.,'.Nc,
SUPPLY LINE
FIGURE 14
To determine if this type of protection can be used, first
divide the longest side of the duct in half. See Figure 15.
IGEST SIDE
FIGURE 15
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Duct Protection (Continued)
8. (Continued)
At the halfway point, center a module 13.5 in. (34 cm) wide.
See Figure 16.
CEN'
IN DI
34.4 cm)
FIGURE 16
Next, check the diagonal dimension of the two remaining
modules to make certain that the maximum diagonal dimen-
sion of 35.5 in. (85 cm) is not exceeded. Both diagonal
dimensions should be the same. Make this check by meas-
uring from one corner of the module to the opposite corner.
See Figure 17.
1 W NOZZLE NOT TO EXCEED
35.5 IN. (90.2 cm)
112 OF
LONGEST SIDE
6 3/4
NOT TO EXCEED (17.2 cm)
35.5 IN. (90.2 cm)
LONGEST SIDE
13 1/2 IN.
34.4 cm)
FIGURE 17
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-5
If this measurement exceeds 35.5 in. (85 cm), triple nozzle
coverage cannot be used. The requirements for "Multiple. -
Nozzle Duct Protection" (using all 2 flow nozzles) must then
be followed.
If the diagonal dimension of 35.5 in. (85 cm) has not been
exceeded on either of the two outside modules, then a 1 W
nozzle (Part No. 56927) can be located in the center of the
13.5 in. (34 cm) wide center module and a 2V1/ nozzle (Part
No. 56928) can be centered in each of the two outside
modules. See Figure 18.
2W NOZZLE
1 W NOZZLE I IIIF 2W NOZZLE
DOUF2WIDTH
1/2 OF
LONGEST SIDE
LONGEST SIDE
1/2 MODULE
WIDTH
6 3/4 IN.
17.2 cm)
FIGURE 18
The nozzles must be positioned on the same centerline, par-
allel to the longest side. See Figure 19.
Y LINE
PARALLEL TO
LONGEST SIDE
FIGURE 19
Triple -nozzle duct protection (5 flow numbers) is limited
to rectangular or square ducts only. This application
cannot be used with round ducts.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-6
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Duct Protection (Continued)
9. Multiple -Nozzle Duct Protection:
For ducts larger than 150 in. (254 cm) perimeter, the total
perimeter of the duct must be divided by 75. If the answer
contains a decimal (or fraction), it must be rounded -up to
the nearest whole number. This answer signifies the number
of equally -sized modules in which the duct must be divided.
The diagonal dimension of each module must not exceed
35.5 in. (90.2 cm). If diagonal dimension is exceeded, addi-
tional module divisions must be added until the diagonal
dimension is not exceeded. A nozzle must then be centered
in each module.
Example: Figure 20 shows a duct opening of 270 in. (686
cm) perimeter. By dividing 270 in. (686 cm) by
75, it is determined that the duct must be
divided into 4 equally -sized modules. Because
the diagonal dimension of each module is 33.54
in. (85.2 cm), it is within the maximum limit of
35.5 in. (90.2 cm) and therefore acceptable as
shown in Figure 21.One nozzle is then centered
in each module as'shown in Figure 22.
15
p
rMAVI-S< <W
33.IN.
85.22 em)
K
33.54 IN.
30 IN.
85.2 em) (
76.3 cm)
33.54 IN. 30 IN.
85.2 cm) (76.3 cm) 7jM N. 30 IN.
m) (76.3 cm)
u 30 IN
15 IN. Y (76.3 cm)
38 cm) FIGURE 21
rnawRE 22
The chart below shows the maximum protection available from
each duct nozzle.
Part 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon
Description No. System System
1 W Nozzle 56927 Maximum Maximum
27 in. (69 cm) 27 in. (69 cm)
Perimeter Perimeter
2W Nozzle 56928 Maximum Maximum
75 in. (191 cm) 75 in. (191 cm)
Perimeter Perimeter
2WH Nozzle 78078 Maximum
75 in. (191 cm)
Perimeter
Electrostatic Precipitator Protection
Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipi-
tator installed at or near the base. These precipitators are used
to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air.
Normally electrostatic precipitators do not require protection but
should the "authority having jurisdiction" require protection, use
the following guidelines.
Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro-
tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N
nozzle(s) (Part No. 56929) for the precipitator. One 1 /2N nozzle
must be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is
stamped with 1/2N, indicating that it is a 1/2-flow nozzle and must
be counted as 1/2 flow number.
When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct
nozzle(s) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to
discharge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a
duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct pro-
tection guidelines. If the area above the precipitator is a transi-
tion, the transition guidelines must be followed. See Figure 20.
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electrostatic Precipitator Protection (Continued)
The 1/2N nozzle (Part No. 56929) must be centered 10 to 26
in. (25 to 66 cm) below the precipitator and aimed to discharge
at the center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is physi-
cally impossible to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66
cm) due to precipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted
closer than 10 in. (25 cm). See Figure 23.
SEE DUCT OR
TRANSITION
DUCT PROTECTION
NOZZLE t
PRECIPITATOR
I
10.26 IN.*
25-66 cm)
NOZZLE FOR
PRECIPITATOR
PROTECTION
IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (25 TO 66 cm), NOZZLE MAY BE MOUNTED
CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm).
FIGURE 23
Plenum Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 W Nozzle (Part No. 56927) or the
1 N Nozzle (Part No. 56930) for plenum protection. The 1 W
nozzle tip is stamped with 1 W and the 1 N nozzle tip is stamped
with 1 N, indicating they are both one -flow nozzles and must be
counted as one flow number each.
1 W NOZZLE — PART NO. 56927
One 1 W nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The
maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last
nozzle must be no more than 2 ft. (.6 m). After the first nozzle,
any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4
ft. (1.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The
plenum width must not exceed 4 ft. (1.2 m). (The 1 W nozzle can
be used on single or V-bank filter arrangements.) See Figure 24.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-7
2 FT.
6 m)
MAXIMUM
4 Fr. (1.2 m)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 24
When protecting plenums with the 1 W nozzle, two options of
coverage are available:
Option 1: The 1 W nozzle must be on the center line of the
single or "V" bank filter and positioned within 1-20
in. (2.5-51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See
Figure 25.
20 IN. (51 cm)
MAXIMUM
1 IN. (2.5 cm)
MINIMUM
20 IN. (51 cm)
MAXIMUM
1 IN. (2.5 cm)
MINIMUM
FIGURE 25
Option 2: The 1 W nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 8-12
in. (20-30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled
to the center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be
within 2 in. (5 cm) from the perpendicular center line
of the filter. See Figure 26.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-8
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Plenum Protection (Continued)
4 IN.
10 cm)
NOZZLE TIP -
MUST BE WITHIN
THIS AREA
12 IN. (30 cm)
MAXIMUM
e IN. (20 cm)
MINIMUM
FIGURE 26
1 N NOZZLE — PART NO. 56930
One 1N nozzle will protect 8 linear feet (2.4 m) of single filter
bank plenum or two 1 N nozzles will protect 8 linear feet (2.4 cm)
of "V" bank plenum. In either application, the nozzle(s) must
be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face
of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and
aimed down the length. The filter height must not exceed 20
in. (51 cm). See Figure 27.
2-4 IN.
5-10 cm) a FT. (2.4 m)
MAXIMUM
20 IN. (51 cm)
MAXIMUM
2-4 IN. \
5 -10 CM)
2-4 IN
5-10 CM)
e FT. (2.4 m)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 27
Exception: When the plenum chamber containers filters that do
not exceed 10 in. (25.4 cm) in height and the 1 N nozzle can be
installed at the intersecting center lines of both filter banks and
not exceed the 2-4 in. (5 to 10 cm) distance from either filters,
a single 1 N nozzle can be used. See Figure 27a.
2-4 IN. 2-4 IN.
5-10 cm) (5r10 cm)
CM)
FIGURE 27a
NOTICE
If 1 N nozzle coverage does not exceed 7 linear
ft. (2.1 m), the nozzle can be mounted 2 to 6
in. (5-15 cm) from the face of the filter.
For a plenum, either single or "V" bank, with a linear extension
longer than 8 feet (2.4 m), each bank may be protected using
one 1 N nozzle every 8 ft. (2.4 m) or less depending on the overall
length of the plenum. See Figure 28. The nozzles may point in
the opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is pro-
tected, and the 8 ft. (2.4 m) limitation is not exceeded. See Figure
29. The nozzle positioning shown in Figure 30 is not an accept-
able method of protection because the plenum area directly
under the tee is not within the discharge pattern of either nozzle.
FIGURE 28
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Plenum Protection (Continued)
FIGURE 29
FIGURE 30
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection — 2-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity
If the fryer does not have a drip board, the maximum hazard
size is 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm), or a maximum dimension
of 15 in. (38 cm) and a maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq.
cm). If the fryer has a drip board, the maximum hazard size is
21 in. x 14 in. (53 cm x 36 cm) or a maximum dimension of 21
in. (53 cm) and a maximum area of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm).
The maximum fryer pot size must still not exceed 15 in. x
14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm). The nozzle must be aimed at the center
of the hazard area.
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for the pro-
tection of fryers.
1. High Proximity Applications: 27 to 47 in. (68 to 119 cm)
above the top surface of fryer. See Figure 31a and Figure
31 b.
The 230 Nozzle (Part No. 418117) is used for high prox-
imity applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 230,
indicating that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted
as two flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the maximum hazard area and angled to the center.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-9
REV. 1
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD
21 IN. (53 cm)
MAXIMUM
14 IN. (36 cm)
rMAXIMUM
I
I I
47 IN. (119 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
230 NOZZLE)
27 IN. (68 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
230 NOZZLE)
15 IN. (38 cm)
MAXIMUM
TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
230 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF
COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 31a
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10
REV. 1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection — 2-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
1. (Continued)
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
15 IN. (38 cm)
MAXIMUM
14 IN. (38 cm)
MAXIMUM (y
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
I
IIIII
I
1
1
47 IN. (119 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
230 NOZZLE)
27 IN. (68 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
230 NOZZLE)
TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
230 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF
COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 31b
2. Low Proximity Applications: 20 to 27 in. (51 to 69 cm)
above top surface of fryer. See Figure 32a and Figure 32b.
The 245 Nozzle (Part No. 418118) is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the maximum hazard area and angled to the center.
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD
21 IN. (53 cm)
MAXIMUM
14 IN. (36 CM) y
MAXIMUM
I I
I I
I
27 IN. (69 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
230 NOZZLE)
20 IN. (51 CM)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
245 NOZZLE)
TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
r-5. cm)
MAXIMUM
245 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF
COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
15 IN. (38 cm)
MAXIMUM
rc
cm)
MAXIMUM
I I
l
FIGURE 32a
27 IN. (61 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
245 NOZZLE)
20 IN. (51 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
245 NOZZLE)
TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
245 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF
COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 32b
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Split Vat Fryer
The protection for split vat fryers is the same as the standard
fryer coverage as stated on Pages 4-9 through 4-10. Once again,
if a fryer does not have a drip board, the maximum hazard size
is 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm), or a maximum dimension of
15 in. (38 cm) and a maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm),If
the fryer has a drip board, the maximum hazard size is 21 in.
x 14 in. (53 cm x 36 cm) or a maximum dimension of 21 in. (53
cm) and a maximum area of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm). (The max-
imum fry pot size must still not exceed 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm
x 36 cm).) The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the hazard
area. See Figure 33.
15 IN. (38 cm)
MAXIMUM
14 IN. (36 cm)
FIGURE 33
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 2-Flow High Proximity/
12-Flow Low Proximity
Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single, 2-flow nozzle (fryer
size of a maximum of 14 in. (36 cm) wide by a maximum of 15
in. (38 cm) long for the cooking area or a fryer with a maximum
of 14 in. (36 cm) wide x 21 in. (53 cm) long including the drip
board) can be protected with multiple nozzles up to a maximum
of 6 sq. ft. (.6 m).
FRYERS WITH DRIP BOARDS
A single R-102 nozzle can protect a maximum surface area of
294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) (fry pot area plus drip board area), or
a maximum of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm) of cooking area of fry
pot only. The longest side of the total hazard must not exceed
21 in. (53 cm). See Figure 33a.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.1
21 IN. (53 cm)
MAXIMUM
0
15 IN.
294 SO. IN. (1897 sq. cm) (
38 cm)
MAXIMUM
1355 sq. cm)
MAXIMUM
14 IN.
36 cm)
FIGURE 33a
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.2
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 2-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITH DRIP BOARDS (Continued)
To properly protect this hazard with multiple nozzles, divide the
surface area into modules not exceeding 294 sq. in. (1897 sq.
cm) (cooking area plus drip board area) and 210 sq. in. (1355
sq. cm) of fry pot only. When dividing into modules, the longest
side of each module must not exceed 21 in. (53 cm). See Figure
33b.
THIS IS TOTAL MODULE
AREA WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
21 IN. (53 cm)
MAXIMUM DIMENSION
COOKING AREA NOT TO
EXCEED 210 SO. IN. (1355 sq. cm)
MAXIMUM
AREA WITH DRIP BOARD
21 IN. (53 cm)
MAXIMUM DIMENSION
INCLUDING DRIP BOARD
COOKING AREA INCLUDING
DRIP BOARD NOT TO EXCEED
294 SO. IN. (1897 sq. cm)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 33b
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for this
protection.
1. High Proximity Applications: 27 to 47 in. (69 to 120 cm)
above the top surface of fryer. See Figure 33c.
The 230 Nozzle (Part No. 418117) is used for high prox-
imity applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 230,
indicating that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted
as two flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the area it is protecting and aimed at the mid point of
the respective modular area.
2. Low Proximity Applications: 20 to 27 in. (51 to 69 cm)
above top surface of fryer. See Figure 33c.
The 245 Nozzle (Part No. 418118) is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
To protect each area, the nozzle tip must be located within
the perimeter of the area it is protecting and aimed at the
mid point of the respective modular area. See Figure 33c.
POSITION NOZZLE TIP
ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN
THE PERIMETER OF THE AREA
IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT
MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR
AREA.
J
230 NOZZLE —
27 IN. TO 47 IN.
69 TO 120 cm)
ABOVE TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
245 NOZZLE —
20 IN. TO 27 IN.
51 TO 69 cm)
ABOVE TOP SURFACE
OF FRYER
FIGURE 33c
See Figure 33d for two examples of modularizing larger drip
board fryers.
28 IN.
EACH MODULE (
71 cm)
MUST NOT 14 IN.
EXCEED (35.6 cm)
294 SO. IN.
1897 sq. cm)
I
AIM NOZZLE AIM NOZZLE 15 IN. AT MIDPOINT I AT MIDPOINT (38 cm)
OF MODULE I OF MODULE
21 IN.
c+
y
53 cm) I T
I
DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD
EXAMPLE ONLY
30 IN.
EACH MODULE (76 cm)
MUST NOT 15 IN.
EXCEED (38 cm)
294 SO. IN.
1897 sq. cm)
I
14 IN.
MIDPOINT MIDPOINT (35.6 cm)
19 5/8 IN.
49Icm)
1 DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD
EXAMPLE ONLY
FIGURE 33d
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 2-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITHOUT DRIP BOARDS
When protecting a fryer without a drip board using multiple
nozzles, the hazard surface area must not exceed 210 sq. in.
1355 sq. cm) per nozzle and the longest side of each module
must not exceed 21 in. (53 cm). See Figure 33e.
MAXIMUM AREA PER NOZZLE
CANNOT EXCEED 210 SO. N.
1355 sq. cm) WITH THE LONGEST
SIDE NOT EXCEEDING 21 IN. (53 cm)
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33e
To properly protect this hazard, divide the surface area into
modules not exceeding 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm). When dividing
into modules, the longest side of each module must not exceed
21 in. (53 cm). See Figure 33f.
MAXIMUM AREA PER NOZZLE
CANNOT EXCEED 210 SO. IN.
1355 sq. cm) WITH THE LONGEST
SIDE NOT EXCEEDING 21 IN. (53 cm)
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33f
R
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.3
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for this
protection.
1. High Proximity Applications: 27 to 47 in. (69 to 130 cm)
above the top surface of fryer. See Figure 33g
The 230 Nozzle (Part No. 418117) is used for high prox-
imity applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 230,
indicating that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted
as two flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the modular area it is protecting and aimed at the mid
point of the respective modular area.
2. Low Proximity Applications: 20 to 27 in. (51 to 69 cm)
above top surface of fryer. See Figure 33g.
The 245 Nozzle (Part No. 418118) is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
To protect each area, the nozzle tip must be located within
the perimeter of the area it is protecting and aimed at the
mid point of the respective modular area. See Figure 33g.
POSITION NOZZLE TIP
ANYWHERE ALONG OR
WITHIN THE AREA IT IS
PROTECTING AND AIM AT
THE MIDPOINT OF THAT
MODULAR AREA
T-1 i I 230 NOZZLE -
i I 27 IN. TO 47 IN.
69 TO 120 cm)
I ABOVE TOP
i I I OF
I I FRYER
I I 245 NOZZLE -
I 20 IN TO 27 IN.
51 TO 69 cm)
ABOVE TOP
CE OF
I I
I
FRYER
I
I
I I I
I
I I
MODULE MUST NOT EXCEED
210 SO. IN. (1355 sq. cm)
21 IN. (53 cm) MAXIMUM ON
LONGEST SIDE
FIGURE 33g
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.4
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity
If the fryer does not have a drip board, the maximum hazard
size is 19 1/2 in. x 19 in. (50 x 48 cm), or the fryer can have
a maximum area of 370 1/2 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) with the lon-
gest side not to exceed 19 1/2 in. (48 cm). If the fryer has a drip
board, the maximum hazard size is 25 3/8 in. x 19 1/2 in. (65
x 50 cm) or the fryer can have a maximum area of 495 sq. in.
3194 sq. cm) with the longest side not to exceed 25 3/8 in. (65
cm). The nozzle must be aimed at the midpoint of the hazard
area.
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for the pro-
tection of fryers.
1. High Proximity Applications: 21 in. to 34 in. (53 x 86 cm)
34 in. (86 cm) maximum diagonal) above the top surface
of fryer. See Figure 33h and Figure 33i.
The 3N nozzle, Part No. 76782, is used for high proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating
that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the maximum hazard area and aimed at the midpoint.
See Figure 33h and 33i.
The maximum distance from the midpoint of the fryer to the
nozzle tip is 34 in. (86 cm). See Figure 33h and 33i.
3N NOZZLE TIP 34 IN. (86 cm)
POSITIONED MAXIMUM DISTANCE TO MIDPOINT
ANYWHERE ALONG OR OF HAZARD AREA
WITHIN PERIMETERS
OF COOKING SURFACE
AND AIMED AT THE
MIDPOINT
21 IN. Pk; (53 cm)
MINIMUM
I I
MAXIMUM COOKING AREA,
INCLUDING DRIP BOARD.
MUST NOT EXCEED
495 SO. IN. (3194 sq. CM)
25 318 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM LONGEST SIDE
34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM
I
I _
r
34 INi (
86 cm)
I MAXIMUM
21 IN. I I DISTANCE TO
53 cm) I I MIDPOINT OF HAZARD
MINIMUM I
I
1
I
10
3N NOZZLE TIP 34 IN. (86 cm)
POSITIONED MAXIMUM
ANYWHERE ALONG OR DISTANCE TO
WITHIN PERIMETER OF MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE HAZARD AREA
AND AIMED AT THE \
MIDPOINT
I 21 IN.
I 53 cm)
I
I
I
MINIMUM
I
III
I I
J
MAXIMUM COOKING
AREA MUST NOT
EXCEED 370 112 SO. IN.
2390 sq. cm)
19 1/2 IN. (50 cm)
MAXIMUM
LONGEST SIDE
34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM
I I
I I
I-- — — 1
I I
34 IN. (86 cm)
MAXIMUM DISTANCE
I TO MIDPOINT OF HAZARD
21 IN.
53 cm)
MINIMUM I I
l I I
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 331
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD I
FIGURE 33h
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Single Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
2. Low Proximity Applications: 13 to 16 in. (33 to 41 cm)
above top surface of fryer. See Figure 33j and 33k.
The 290 Nozzle, Part No. 418120, is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned over the midpoint of the hazard area
3 in. from the midpoint along the longest side of the
area and +/— 1 in. from the midpoint along the shortest
side of the area and aimed at the midpoint. See Figure 33j
and 33k.
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA t 3
IN. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD
AND f 1 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE
HAZARD AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
MAXIMUM COOKING
AREA MUST NOT
EXCEED 495 SO. IN. \
3194 sq. cm) i
25 318 IN. (65 cm) \ 16 IN.
MAXIMUM (41 cm)
LONGEST SIDE I`\ i
i 131N. MAXIMUM
i (33 cm)
MINIMUM
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33j
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA 3 3
IN. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD
AND i 1 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE
HAZARD AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
MAXIMUM COOKING
AREA MUST NOT
EXCEED 370 1/2 SO. IN. i 16 IN.
2390 sq. cm) \ (41 cm)
19 1/2 IN. \ " MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM - I 131N.
LONGEST SIDE
I
I ,
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33k
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.5
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity
Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle (fryer size of
a maximum 19 1/2 in. (50 cm) wide by a maximum of 19 in.
48 cm) long for the cooking area or a fryer with a maximum
of 19 1/2 in. wide x 25 3/8 in. long (50 x 65 cm) including the
drip board) can be protected with multiple nozzles up to a max-
imum of 6 sq. ft. (.6 m).
FRYERS WITH DRIP BOARDS
A single R-102 nozzle can protect a maximum surface area of
495 sq. in. (3194 sq. cm) (fry pot area plus drip board area), or
a maximum of 370 1/2 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) of fry pot only. The
longest side of the total hazard must not exceed 25 3/8 in. (65
cm). See Figure 331.
TOTAL SURFACE
AREA 495 SO. IN.
3194 sq. cm)
MAXIMUM
25 3/8 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM
nr., __CQT cinc
370 1/2 IN. SO.
2390 sq. cm)
MAXIMUM
FRY POT AREA ONLY)
19 1/2 IN. (50 Cm)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 331
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.6
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITH DRIP BOARDS (Continued)
To properly protect this hazard with multiple nozzles, divide the
surface area into modules not exceeding 495 sq. in. (3194 sq.
cm) (cooking area plus drip board area) and 3701/2 sq. in. (2390
sq. cm) of fry pot only. When dividing into modules, the longest
side of each module must not exceed 25 3/8 in. (65 cm). See
Figure 33m.
THIS IS TOTAL MODULE AREA
WITHOUT DRIP BOARD.
25 3/8 IN. (65 cm) MAXIMUM
DIMENSION. (COOKING AREA
NOT TO EXCEED 370 1/2 SO. IN.
2390 sq. cm))
THIS IS TOTAL MODULE
AREA WITH DRIP BOARD
25 318 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM DIMENSION
INCLUDING DRIP BOARD.
COOKING AREA INCLUDING DRIP
BOARD MUST NOT EXCEED
495 SO. IN. (3194 Sq. cm)
FIGURE 33m
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for the pro-
tection of fryers.
1. High Proximity Applications: 21 in. to 34 in. (53 to 86 cm)
34 in. (86 cm) maximum diagonal) above the top surface
of fryer. See Figure 33n.
The 3N nozzle, Part No. 76782, is used for high proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating
that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the area it is protecting and aimed at the mid point of
the respective modular area.
The maximum distance from the midpoint of the fryer to the
nozzle tip is 34 in. (86 cm). See Figure 33n.
3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER
OF THE MODULAR AREA AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT RESPECTIVE
AREA.
34 IN. (86 cm)
MAXIMUM
DISTANCE TO
MIDPOINT OF
HAZARD
21 IN.
53 cm)
MINIMUM
I I I
34 IN. (86 cm)
T_ 1MAXIMUMDISTANCE TO
21 IN. I I MIDPOINT OF
53 cm) I ) HAZARD
MINIMUM I I
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33n
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITH DRIP BOARDS (Continued)
2. Low Proximity Applications: 13 to 16 in. (33 to 41 cm)
above top surface of fryer. See Figure 33o.
The 290 Nozzle, Part No. 418120, is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned over the midpoint of the respective
modular area +/— 3 in. from the midpoint along the lon-
gest side of the module and +/— 1 in. from the midpoint
along the shortest side of the module and aimed at mid-
point. See Figure 33o.
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPONT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR
AREA 3 3 IN, FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE MODULE
AND t 1 IN. FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE MODULE
AND AIMED AT MIDPOINT.
25 3/8 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM DIMENSION
MAXIMUM COOKING AREA NOT
TO EXCEED 370 1/2 SO. IN.
2390 sq. cm)
i
I
II
I
16 IN.
41 CM)
MAXIMUM
jlyy'
j ,
L
13 IN.
33 Cm)
MINIMUM
MIDPOINT
OF MODULE
25 318 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM DIMENSION
MAXIMUM COOKING AREA
INCLUDING DRIP BOARD, NOT
TO EXCEED 495 SO. IN.
3194 sq. cm)
FRYER WITH DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33o
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.7
See Figure 33p for an example of modularizing a larger drip
board fryer.
EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIP BOARD MUST NOT EXCEED 495 SO. IN.
3194 sq. cm)
34 IN.
86 cm)
17 IN.
43 cm)
i
MIDPOINT
I MIDPOINT 191N.
25 318 IN.
I (
48 cm)
65 cm)
I
I
DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD
I
EXAMPLE ONLY
FIGURE 33p
0.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-10.8
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITHOUT DRIP BOARDS
When protecting a fryer without a drip board using multiple
nozzles, the hazard surface area must not exceed 370 1/2 sq.
in. (2390 sq. cm) per nozzle and the longest side of each module
must not exceed 25 3/8 in. (65 cm) and aimed at midpoint. See
Figure 33q.
EXCEED 370 1/2 SO. IN.
2390 sq. cm) WITH THE
LONGEST SIDE NOT
EXCEEDING 25 318 IN.
65 cm)
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
FIGURE 33q
To properly protect this hazard, divide the surface area into
modules not exceeding 370 1/2 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm). When
dividing into modules, the longest side of each module must not
exceed 25 3/8 in. (65 cm). See Figure 33r.
CA',CCU Jiu vz au. IN.
2390 sq. cm)
25 3/8 IN. (65 cm)
MAXIMUM
LONGEST SIDE
FIGURE 33r
10
The R-102 system uses two different style nozzles for this
protection.
1. High Proximity Application: 21 in. to 34 in. (53 to 86 cm)
34 in. (86 cm) maximum diagonal) above the top surface
of the fryer. See Figure 33s.
The 3N nozzle, Part No. 76782, is used for high proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating
that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter
of the modular area it is protecting and aimed at the mid
point of the respective modular area.
The maximum distance from the midpoint of the fryer to the
nozzle tip is 34 in. (86 cm).
3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF THE
MODULAR AREA AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR
AREA.
it
34 IN. (86 cm)
MAXIMUM 0
DISTANCE 2
TO MIDPOINT
OF MODULAR
AREA
I I alllliI 21 IN.
53 cm)
MINIMUM
i
MIDPOINT OF MODULE
34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM
711
i
I
I
I
I
or -
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
F 34 IN. (8 6 cm)
MAXIMUM DIS
OINT OF HAZARDTOMIDPOINT
I
21 IN. )
53 cm)
MINIMUM
FIGURE 33s
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 3-Flow High Proximity/
2-Flow Low Proximity (Continued)
FRYERS WITHOUT DRIP BOARDS (Continued)
2. Low Proximity Application: 13 to 16 in. (33 to 41 cm) above
top surface of fryer. See Figure 33t.
The 290 Nozzle, Part No. 418120, is used for low proximity
applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290, indicating
that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two
flow numbers.
When using this nozzle for fryer protection, the nozzle tip
must be positioned over the midpoint of the respective
modular area +/— 3 in. from the midpoint along the lon-
gest side of the module and +/— 1 in. from the midpoint
along the shortest side of the module and aimed at the mid-
point. See Figure 33t.
290 NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE
MODULAR AREA 3 31N. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE
OF THE MODULAR AND 3 1 IN. (7.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE
SHORTEST SIDE OF THE MODULE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
i
16 IN.
41 cm)
MAXIMUM
13 IN.
33 cm)
MINIMUM
MIDPOINT OF MODULE
FRYER WITHOUT DRIP BOARD
Range Protection
FIGURE 33t
The R-102 system uses three different nozzles for the protec-
tion of ranges.
1. High Proximity Application: 40 in. to 50 in. (102 cm to 127
cm) above the cooking surface.
The high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part
No. 418118.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 245 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 672 sq. in.
4335 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 28 in. x 24 in.
71 cm x 61 cm).
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in
Figures 34 and 35.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-11
REV. 1
28IN. (71 cm) 24 IN. cm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
Irr i T
i<
1
I
I
I I I
I I I
I I I
245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTER LINE OF COOKING SURFACE
i
I
I
50 IN. (127 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 245 NOZZLE TIP
140 IN. (102 cm)
I I MINIMUMHEIGHT
OF 245
I NOZZLE TIP
I
I
I
I j
O O O O
ap
FIGURE 34
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-12
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Range Protection (Continued)
1. (Continued)
245 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
OR
11 3/8 IN. (29 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
TO CENTER OF ANY.
BURNER
245 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
OR
11 3/8 IN. (29 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER
28 IN. (71 cm)
MAXIMUM
28 IN. (71 cm)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 35
NOTICE
Four burners shown in Figure 35. For single
or double burners, locate nozzle at center of
cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) max-
imum from nozzle centerline to center of any
burner.
2. Medium Proximity Application: 30 in. to 40 in. (76 cm to
102 cm) above the cooking surface.
The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part
No. 418119.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 672 sq. in.
4335 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 28 in. is 24 in.
71 cm x 61 cm).
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in
Figures 36 and 37.
26 IN. (71 cm) 24 IN. (61 cm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
I 1 I I
I I I )
E TIP LOCATION
ULN I LH UNE OF COOKING SURFACE
40 IN. (102 cm)
I MAXIMUM
HEIGHT OF
260 NOZZLE
TIP
I
30 IN. (76 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT OF
260 NOZZLE
TIP
lilrel"o • •
FIGURE 36
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Range Protection (Continued)
24 IN. (61 cm)
MAXIMUM
260 NOBLE TIP ®
1L—L
LOCATION
CENTER OF COOKING
SURFACE
28 IN. (71 cm)
OR
MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER
24 IN. (61 cm)
MAXIMUM
260 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION
CENTER OF COOKING 28 IN. (71 cm)
SURFACE MAXIMUM
OR
11 318 IN. (29 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER
FIGURE 37
NOTICE
Four burners shown in Figure 37. For single
or double burners, locate nozzle at center of
cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) max-
imum from nozzle centerline to center of any
burner.
3. Low Proximity Application: 15 in. to 20 in. (38 cm to 51
cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity application requires two (2) 290 nozzles,
Part No. 418120.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 sq.
in. (6503 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 28 in. x 36
in. (71 cm x 92 cm).
When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range
protection, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking
surface perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter,
and aimed at a 450 angle along the longitudinal centerline
of the range. See Figures 38 and 39.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-13
28 IN. (71 cm)
MAXIMUM 36 IN. (91 cm)
r MAXIMUM
i
290 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION 0 — 1.5 IN.
0 — 3.8 cm) IN FROM
EDGE OF COOKING
SURFACE
45; 45°
Ij I
I II
MINIMUM
cm)
I I i i MINIMUM
cm)
II II
20 IN. (51 Cm) 20 IN. (51 cm)
MAXIMUM O O O O O O MAXIMUM
FIGURE 38
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-14
REV. 1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Range Protection (Continued)
3. (Continued)
36 IN. (91 cm) LONGITUDINAL
MAXIMUM
CENTERLINE
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
0 — 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM
EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
0 — 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM
EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE
28 IN. (71 cm)
MAAXIMUM
1
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE
t 2 IN. (5 cm)
36 IN. (91 cm) 28 IN. (71 cm)
MAXIMUM -7 MAXIMUM
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE
f 2 IN. (5 cm)
FIGURE 39
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Griddle Protection
The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection
of griddles. One of the applications requires a one -flow nozzle
and three of the applications require a two -flow nozzle.
One -Flow Griddle Protection
1. High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm)
above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 1 N nozzle, Part No.
56930.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating this is a one -
flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a cooking area of 1080 sq. in.
6968 sq. cm) with the maximum longest side of 36 in.
91 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle
must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to
a maximum of 2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed
to the midpoint of the cooking surface. See Figure 40a and
40b.
NOTICE
When using this type of griddle protection,
only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5
gallon system and only 11 flow numbers are
allowed on a 3 gallon system.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-14.1
30 IN.
76 cm) 36 IN. (91 cm)
MAXIMUM
I
r< )
I
I
II
NOZZLE LOCATION
0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm)
I INSIDE PERIMETER I I
OF COOKING SURFACE )
II/ II
I I 40 IN. (102 cm)
I I MAXIMUM
EDGE OF I I I I HEIGHT OF
COOKING I I I 260 NOZZLE TIP
SURFACE I 1 / I I 35 IN. (89 cm) MINIMUM
I I I I HEIGHT OF260NOZZLE
I I I
I TIP
II I
FIGURE 40a
MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE
I I
l
I
L--------
1
J
IN NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE
COOKING SURFACE EDGE
FIGURE 40b
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-14.2
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Two -Flow Griddle Protection
1. High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127
cm) above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part
No. 418119.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 1440 sq. in.
9290 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 30 in, x 48 in.
76 cm x 122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle
must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to
2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center.of
the cooking surface. See Figure 40c and 40d.
30 IN. 30
cm) 36 IN. (91 cm)
MAXIMUM
r<'
I I
I I ! I
NOZZLE LOCATION
0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm)
INSIDE PERIMETER I
OF COOKING SURFACE
II/ 11
I I I 40 IN. (102 cm)
MAXIMUM
EDGE OF I I I I HEIGHT OF
COOKING I I I I 260 NOZZLE TIP
SURFACE 1 I / I I 35 IN. (89 cm) MINIMUM
I I I I HEIGHT OFI260NOZZLE
II TIP
II j
FIGURE 40c
MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE '
I + I
AIM POINT)
L--------
1 J
260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG ANY SIDE OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE
GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN.
0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE.
NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 46d
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Two -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued)
2. High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127
cm) above the cooking surface. (Continued)
This second high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle,
Part No. 418120.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 290 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 720 sq. in.
9290 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 24 in. x 30 in.
61 cm x 76 cm).
When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the
nozzle must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the center
of the cooking surface and pointed vertically down. See
Figure 41a and 42b.
30 IN. cm)
24 IN.
MAXIM(UMcm)
MAXIMUM
I
I II I
I
I iI
CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE
SURFACE f 1 IN. IN
ANY DIRECTION
I
I
I
I
50 IN. (127 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT OF
290 NOZZLE
I I
TIP
1\
30 IN. (76 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT OF
290 NOZZLE
TIP
FIGURE 41a
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-15
REV. 1
NOZZLE M
IN. 161 cm)
MAXIMUM
LOCATION
1 IN. (2 cm)
MAXIMUM
CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE OR A
MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN. (52
cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO
FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE
1 IN. (2 cm)
MAXIMUM
30 IN. (76 cm)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 41b
3. Medium Proximity Application: 20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to
76 cm) above the cooking surface.
The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part
No. 418120.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 290 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 1440 sq. in.
9290 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 30 in. x 48 in.
76 cm x 122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle
must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm)
inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking
surface. See Figure 42 and 43.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-16
REV. 1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Two -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued)
30 IN. (76 cm)
MAXIMUM 46 IN. cm)
MAXIMUMUM
I<
I I
I I
II j
II I
I I
NOZZLE LOCATION I I
0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) INSIDE
al f.s- PERIMETER OF COOKING
SURFACE
I I MAXIMUM
cm)
I I I HEIGHT OF
I / I 120 IN. (51 cm) 290 NOZZLE
I / I I MINIMUM TIP
I HEIGHT OF
I I /
290 NOZZLE
1 TIP
II I
EDGE OF
COOKING
JI SURFACE
FIGURE 42
r r CENTER OF
I COOKING
SURFACE
r
AIM POINT)
l
L--------L J
290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm)
OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE.
NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT
CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE
COOKING SURFACE EDGE
FIGURE 43
Low Proximity Application: 10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51
cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part
No. 418121.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two -
flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 2120 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 1440 sq. in.
9290 sq. cm) with maximum dimensions of 30 in. x 48 in.
76 cm x 122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle
must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm)
inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking
surface. See Figure 44 and 45.
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Two -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued)
30 , IN
MA. XIM(76UM cm)
46 IN. (121 cm)
MAXIMUM
I
I
II IIII
II
NOZZLE LOCATION
I
0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm)
INSIDE PERIMETER
OF COOKING 20 IN. (51 cm)
SURFACE I MAXIMUM
HEIGHT OF
I 2120 NOZZLE
TIP
l i 10 IN. cm)
MINIMUMIIHEIGHTOF
I I 2120 NOZZLE
TIP
I I I
EDGE OF
COOKING
SURFACE
FIGURE 44
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-17
REV. 1
rCENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
f I
I /
I
AIM POINT)
L--------J
EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE
2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm)
OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE
NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED
AT CENTER OF COOKING
SURFACE.
FIGURE 45
Chain Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses two 1 N Nozzles (Part No. 56930) for
chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1 N, indicating
that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow
number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being
protected).
Two 1 N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler protection
when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the "Over-
head Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum internal
size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles
must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber
1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a
maximum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening.
The nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they
are at opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to dis-
charge diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 46
and 47.
5 cm)
FIGURE 46
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-18
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Chain Broiler Protection (Continued)
MAXIMUM 11
BROILER St
43 X 31 IN.
109 X 79 cn
FIGURE 47
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses two 1 W Nozzles (Part No. 56927) for
overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with
1 W, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with
exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the
internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal
broiler width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (30.5 x 30.5
cm). Internal broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x 34 in.
81 x 86 cm).
Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in.
wide (61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16
in. (40.6 x 40.6 cm).
To determine minimum opening size, multiply the
internal length and the internal width by 0.6:
Length of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm
x 0.6 = 36.6 cm)
Width of opening - 20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in. (51 cm
x 0.6 = 30.5 cm)
The minimum allowable opening for overhead pro-
tection would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm).
This example would be acceptable for overhead
protection.
Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in.
wide (76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in.
56 x 30 cm).
To determine minimum opening size, multiply
internal length and internal width by 0.6:
Length of opening - 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in. (76 cm
x 0.6 = 45.7 cm)
Width of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm
x 0.6 = 36.6 cm)
Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection
would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm).
Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in, x 12
in., the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable
calculated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and there-
fore would not be acceptable for overhead
protection.
When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be cen-
tered above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm)
of each other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66
cm) above the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 48.
4-0 IN. (10.20 cm)
12 IN. (30.5 cm)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM INTERNAL
BROILER SIZE
32 x 34 IN.
81 x 99 cm)
FIGURE 48
The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly
spaced from the exhaust center and are always 1800 opposite
of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must
be positioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side
of the opening. See Figure 49.
TOP VIEW
1
T
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 49
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Nieco Broiler With Catalytic Converter Protection
Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960)
are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean
air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these
broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these
broilers are as follows:
The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74
cm x 60 cm).
An R-102 3-gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow
numbers, must be used for protection of each broiler,
including plenum and duct.
Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum
of (2) two, 1 N nozzles, Part No.56930. The nozzles must
be located as shown in Figure 50.
The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent
barriers on the angled surface of the broiler. See Figure 50.
If these have not been completed by the equipment sup-
plier, they must be added in the field.
30°
0\
2) 1N NOZZLES
PART NO. 56930 ~
D D 1 14.25 f 1 IN.
36 cm)
12 IN. TO 13 IN.
31 cm TO 33 cm) I r
tL-- _ J
LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm) ON EACH
SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE
14.25 3 1 IN.
36 cm)
a _ t
FIGURE 50
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-19
Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses two 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 56929) for
all upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is
stamped 1/2N, indicating that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair
of these nozzles will equal one flow number.
Two 1/2N broiler nozzles will protect a hazard area (internal
broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These
nozzles must always be used in pairs on an upright/salamander
broiler. One nozzle must be positioned above the grate and
pointed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The
second nozzle must be pointed down into the center of the drip
pan through the open slot. See Figure 51.
SALAMANDER BROILER
UPRIGHT BROILER
BROILER CHAMBER
SIDE VIEW
FIGURE 51
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-20
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric Char -Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 N nozzle for the protection of elec-
tric char -broilers. The maximum length of the hazard can be no
longer than 34 in. (86 cm) and the total hazard area must not
exceed 680 sq. in. (4388 sq. cm).
1. Nozzle Location: 20 to 50 in. (51 to 127 cm) above the grate
surface.
The 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 56930) is used for electric char -
broiler applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N,
indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
When using this nozzle for electric char -broiler protection,
the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the
perimeter of the maximum hazard area and aim at the center
of the cooking surface. See Figure 52.
M XI
34 (
51 cm) I}
IN. cm) MAXIMUM I MAXIMUM
I i
I
I
I \ I
I I 50 IN. (127 cm)
I I MAXIMUM
I \ /
zo7IN(51 cm)
MINIMUM
FIGURE 52
Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 245 Nozzle (Part No. 418118) for
all gas -radiant char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped
with 245, indicating that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be
counted as two flow numbers.
One 245 nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length
of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total hazard area which does not exceed
528 sq. in. (3406 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to
40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this
nozzle for gas -radiant char -broiler protection, the nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum hazard area and aimed at the center of the cooking sur-
face. See Figure 53.
i
i
1
I 7
1
40 IN.(102 cm)
All
MAXIMUM
I
FIGURE 53
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 56930) for all
lava rock char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with
1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total hazard area which does not exceed
312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to
35 in. (46 to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this
nozzle for lava rock (ceramic) char -broiler protection, the nozzle
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of
the maximum hazard area and angled to the center. See
Figure 54.
13 IN.
33 cm) 24 IN. (61 cm)
r MAXIMUM
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I / I
I
I I
I I 35 IN. (69 cm)
MAXIMUM
111-
7I \ I I
FIGURE 54
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-21
Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 56930) for all
natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped
with 1 N indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be
counted as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum
length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total hazard area which does not
exceed 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located
18 to 40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using
this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum hazard area and aimed at the center of the cooking sur-
face. See Figure 55.
The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth
of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm).
12 IN.
30 cm) 24 IN. (61 cm)
MAXIMUM ,
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I
I
I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I
I
I I
40 IN. (102 cm)
I
MAXIMUM
I
I I
16 IN. (46 cm)
I \ I MINIMUM
I i
I
4 IN. (10 cm)
MAXIMUM
I
DEPTH
FIGURE 55
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-22
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char -broiler Protection
The R-102 system may also use the 3N nozzle (Part No. 76782)
for all ceramic (lava rock) and natural charcoal char -broiler pro-
tection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating that this
is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow
numbers.
One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total hazard area which does not exceed
720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to
40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum hazard area and angled to the center. See Figure 56.
For natural charcoal char -boiler protection, this coverage only
applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in.
10 cm).
24 IN. (81 ern) 30 IN. (76 cm)
r MAXIMUM
I I
I I I
I
I I I
I I
I I I I
I I I
CS
l I
I
I I
I I ao IN. (toe ern)
1 I MAXIMUM
I
I I
I \ 114 IN. (36 cm)
1 \ MINIMUM
i
4 IN. (10 cm)
MAXIMUM I I
DEPTH
FIGURE 56
Mesquite Char -Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 3N Nozzle (Part No. 76782) for mes-
quite char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N
indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted
as three flow numbers.
One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total hazard area which does not exceed
720 sq. In. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to
40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum hazard area and aimed at the center of the cooking sur-
face. See Figure 57.
Mesquite logs and pieces, no smaller than 4 in. (10 cm) in length,
may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of
6 in. (15 cm).
24 IN.
30 IN. (76 cm) 81 cm)
MAXIMUM
I >
i
I I
I I
I I I
I I
ll I
I ,
I
I\
I
I
I )
1 I 40 IN. (102 cm)
I , l MAXIMUM
L_
T
1
I
I \ I
114 IN. (38 cm)
1
V//
MINIMUM
I
8 IN. (15 cm) I
I _1L_1LMAXIMUMII
DEPTH
FIGURE 57
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-23
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Wok Protection
The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection
of woks.
1. A 260 nozzle, Part No. 418119, will protect a wok 14 in. (36
cm) minimum diameter up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum
diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (9.5
cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm).
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is
a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as
shown in Figure 58.
2. A 1 N nozzle, Part No. 56930, will protect a wok 14 in.
36 cm) minimum diameter up to 18 in. (46 cm) maximum
diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (9.5
cm) and no greater than 5 in. (13 cm).
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this is a
one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number.
When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as
shown in Figure 58.
1 IN. (2 cm)
NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED
RADIUS
WITHIN 1 IN. (2 cm) RADIUS -
OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, k_
POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN
1 35 - 45 IN.(89 - 114 Cm)
FOR 260 NOZZLE
35 - 40IN. (89 - 102 cm) FOR
1N NOZZLE FIGURE
58
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-24
REV. 1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Nozzle Application Chart
The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating
the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct,
plenum, or appliance.
NOTICE
This chart is for general reference only. See
complete details for each type of hazard.
Nozzle Tip
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping —
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — 56927/415567 1 W/1 WS
Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 27 in. (67 cm)
Diameter — 8.5 in. (22 cm)
Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — 56928/78078 2W/2WH'
Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 75 in. (190.5 cm)
Diameter — 24 in. (61 cm)
Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 2 — 56928/78078' 2W/2WH'
Dual Nozzle) Perimeter — 150 in. (381 cm)
Diameter — 48 in. (122 cm)
Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 — 56929 1/2N
At Base of Duct)
Plenum Length — 8 ft. (2.4 m) 1 — 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Horizontal Protection) Filter Height — 20 in. (51 cm)
Plenum Length — 4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 — 56927/415567/417333 1 W/1 WS/1 WSS
Vertical Protection) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m)
Fryer/Split Vat Fryer Longest Side
without drip board)
15 in. (38 cm)
Area — 210 sq. in.
1355 sq. cm)
High Proximity 1 27 — 47 in. 418117 230
Low Proximity 1 20 — 27 in. 418118 245
Longest Side (with drip board)
21 in. (53 cm)
Area — 294 sq. in.
1897 sq. cm)
Fry Pot must not exceed
15in. x14in. 38
cm x 36 cm)) High
Proximity 1 27 — 47 in. 418117 230 Low
Proximity 1 20 — 27 in. 418118 245 Fryer
Longest Side (without drip board)
19
1/2 in. (49.5 cm) Area —
370 1/2 sq. in. 2390
sq. cm) High
Proximity 1 21 — 34 in. 76782 3N Low
Proximity 1 13 — 16 in. 418120 290 Longest
Side (with drip board) 25
1/2 in. (64.5 cm) Area —
495 sq. in. 3194
sq. cm) Fry
pot longest side must not
exceed 19 1/2 in. and maximum
area of 370
1/2 sq. in.) High
Proximity 1 21 — 34 in. 76782 3N Low
Proximity 1 13 — 16 in. 418120 290 Use
2WH nozzle on t.s gallon, 6 flow, dud and plenum protection only.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-25
REV. 1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Nozzle Application Chart Continued)
Nozzle Tip
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping -
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Range Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 40 - 50 in. 418118 245
28 in. (71 cm) 102 - 127 cm)
Area - 672 sq. in.
4335 sq. cm)
Longest Side 1 30 - 40 in. 418119 260
Medium Proximity) 76 - 102 cm)
28 in. (71 cm)
Area - 672 sq. in.
4335 sq. cm)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 15 - 20 in. 418120 290
36 in. (91 cm) 38 - 51 cm)
Area - 1008 sq. in.
6503 sq. cm)
Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 - 50 in. 418119 260
48 in. (122 cm) 76 - 127 cm)
Area - 1440 sq. in. perimeter
9290 sq. cm) located)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 - 50 in. 418120 290
30 in. (76 cm) 76 - 127 cm)
Area - 720 sq. in. center located)
1829 sq. cm)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 — 40 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
36 in. (91 cm) 89 - 102 cm)
Area - 1080 sq. in. perimeter
2743 sq. cm) located)
Longest Side 1 20 - 30 in. 418120 290
Medium Proximity) 51 - 76 cm)
48 in. (122 cm) perimeter
Area - 1440 sq. in. located)
9190 sq. cm)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 - 20 in. 418121 2120
48 in. (122 cm) 25 - 51 cm)
Area - 1440 sq. in. perimeter
9290 sq. cm) located)
Chain Broiler' Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 2 10 - 26 in. 56927/415567/417333 1 W/1 WS/1 WSS
Overhead Protection) Area - 1088 sq. in. 25 - 66 cm)
7019 sq. cm)
Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 - 3 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Horizontal Protection) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) 3 - 8 cm)
Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 40 in. 418118 245
Area - 528 sq. in. 46 - 102 cm)
3406 sq. cm)
Electric Char -Broiler Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 50 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area - 680 sq. in. 51 - 127 cm)
4388 sq. cm)
Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 35 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area - 312 sq. in. 46 - 89 cm)
2013 sq. cm)
Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening — 12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm). and not less Char 60% of internal broiler size.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-25.1
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Nozzle Application Chart (Continued)
Nozzle Tip
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping —
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 40 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area — 288 sq. in. 46 — 102 cm)
1858 sq. cm)
Lava -Rock or Natural Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 — 40 in. 76782 3N
Charcoal Char -Broiler Area — 720 sq. in. 36 — 102 cm)
4645 sq. cm)
Mesquite Char -Broiler Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 — 40 in. 76782 3N
Area — 720 sq. in. 36 — 102 cm)
4645 sq. cm)
Upright Broiler Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 56929 1/2N
Width — 30 in. (76 cm)
Salamander Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 56929 1/2N
Broiler Width — 30 in. (76 cm)
Wok 14 in. — 30 in. (36 — 76 cm) 1 35 — 45 in. 418119 260
Diameter 89 — 114 cm)
3.75 — 8.0 in. (9.5 — 20 cm)
Deep
14 in. — 18 in. (36 — 46 cm) 1 35 — 40 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Diameter 89 — 102 cm)
3.75 — 5.0 in. (9.5 — 13 cm)
Deep
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-25.2
NOTES:
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-26
REV. 1
TANK QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS
The purpose of this section is to establish the type of system
and quantity of tanks needed to properly supply the discharge
nozzles with enough agent at the proper flow rate. Once this
is determined, the location of the components will depend on
the piping requirements between the tank and the regulated
release mechanism, as well as between the tank and each
hazard.
System Variations
1. The Single -Tank System includes: one agent tank and one
regulated release mechanism with an expellant gas car-
tridge housed within a single enclosure.
2. The Double -Tank System includes: one agent tank and one
regulated release mechanism with an expellant gas car-
tridge housed within a single enclosure. Plus, one additional
tank with a separate mounting assembly.
3. The Multiple -Tank System varies according to the number
of agent tanks required to suit the application. Refer to the
chart below for equipment involved:
Tank — Remote
Regulated Regulated Enclosure/ Mechanical
Tank Release Actuator Bracket Release
Oty. Assembly Assemblyt Assembly Assemblytt
3 1' 1 1 — —
4 1" 1 2 --
5 1' 2 2 — —
6 1" 2 3 --
7 -- 4 3 1
8 -- 4 4 1
9 -- 5 4 1
10 -- 5 5 1
LT-20-R Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 7032).
LT-30-R Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 5373).
101.10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15850) or
101-20 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 17492) required.
Double -Tank" Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 73022) or
101-30 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15851) required.
t"Double-Tank" Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 73022).
LT-A-101.30 Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 29187) or
101.30 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15851) required.
it101.10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15850) required for actuation only.
NOTE: See System Selection Guide in Appendix Section for Cartridge Requirements.
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN
LT-20-R, LT-30-R. 101.10 OR 101.20
MAX. LENGTH OF 20 FT. (8 m),
MAX. NO. OF FITTINGS 9
10 "ANSUL AUTOMAN"
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation
and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mecha-
nism regulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each
agent tank. These limitations should be considered when
selecting the component mounting locations.
Actuation Gas Line — 6 Tanks Maximum
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva-
nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated
release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected
within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line
from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actu-
ator assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using
an LT-20-R (Part No. 7032), an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge
Part No. 5373), or a 101-10 (Part No. 15850) or a 101-20
Part No. 17492) carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 59.
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
EXPELLANT GAS LINES ///'''''-''
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION/ /
GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 59
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-25
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Nozzle Application Chart (Continued)
Nozzle Tip
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping —
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 — 50 in. 418119 260
48 in. (122 cm) 76 — 127 cm)
Area — 1440 sq. in. perimeter
9290 sq. cm) located)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 — 50 in. 418120 290
30 in. (76 cm) 76 — 127 cm)
Area — 720 sq. in. center located)
1829 sq. cm)
Longest Side 1 20 — 30 in. 418120 290
Medium Proximity) 51 — 76 cm)
48 in. (122 cm) perimeter
Area — 1440 sq. in. located)
9190 sq. cm)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 — 20 in. 418121 2120
48 in. (122 cm) 25 — 51 cm)
Area — 1440 sq. in. perimeter
9290 sq. cm) located)
Chain Broiler' Longest Side — 34 in. (86 cm) 2 10 — 26 in. 56927/415567/417333 1 W/1 WS/1 WSS
Overhead Protection) Area — 1088 sq. in. 25 — 66 cm)
7019 sq. cm)
Chain Broiler Length — 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 — 3 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Horizontal Protection) Width — 31 in. (79 cm) 3 — 8 cm)
Gas -Radiant Ch— !': :: angest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 40 in. 418118 245
Area — 528 sq. in. 46 — 102 cm)
3406 sq. cm)
Electric Char -Broiler Longest Side — 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 — 50 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area — 680 sq. in. 51 — 127 cm)
4388 sq. cm)
Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 35 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area — 312 sq. in. 46 — 89 cm)
2013 sq. cm)
Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 40 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Area — 288 sq. in. 46 — 102 cm)
1858 sq. cm)
Lava -Rock or Natural Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 — 40 in. 76782 3N
Charcoal Char -Broiler Area — 720 sq. in. 36 — 102 cm)
4645 sq. cm)
Mesquite Char -Broiler Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 — 40 in. 76782 3N
Area — 720 sq. in. 36 — 102 cm)
4645 sq. cm)
Upright Broiler Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 56929 1/2N
Width — 30 in. (76 cm)
Salamander Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 56929 1/2N
Broiler Width — 30 in. (76 cm)
Wok 14 in. — 30 in. (36 — 76 cm) 1 35 — 45 in. 418119 260
Diameter 89 — 114 cm)
3.75 — 8.0 in. (9.5 — 20 cm)
Deep
14 in. — 18 in. (36 — 46 cm) 1 35 — 40 in. 56930/415566/417332 1 N/1 NS/1 NSS
Diameter 89 — 102 cm)
3.75 — 5.0 in. (9.5 — 13 cm)
Deep
Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening 12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm). and not less than 60% of internal broiler size.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-26
TANK QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS
The purpose of this section is to establish the type of system
and quantity of tanks needed to properly supply the discharge
nozzles with enough agent at the proper flow rate. Once this
is determined, the location of the components will depend on
the piping requirements between the tank and the regulated
release mechanism, as well as between the tank and each
hazard.
System Variations
1. The Single -Tank System includes: one agent tank and one
regulated release mechanism with an expellant gas car-
tridge housed within a single enclosure.
2.
74
The Double -Tank System includes: one agent tank and one
regulated release mechanism with an expellant gas car-
tridge housed within a single enclosure. Plus, one additional
tank with a separate mounting assembly.
The Multiple -Tank System varies according to the number
of agent tanks required to suit the application. Refer to the
chart below for equipment involved:
Tank — Remote
Regulated Regulated Enclosure/ Mechanical
Tank Release Actuator Bracket Release
Oty. Assembly Assemblyt Assembly Assemblytt
3 1' 1 1
4 1" 1 2
5 1' 2 2
6 1" 2 3
7 4 3 1
8 4 4 1
9 5 4 1
10 5 5 1
LT-20.R Nitrogen Cartridge (Pan No. 7032).
LT-30-R Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 5373).
101.10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15850) or
101.20 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Pan No. 17492) required.
Double -Tank" Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 73022) or
101-30 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Pan No. 15851) required.
t"Double-Tank' Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 73022),
LT-A-101.30 Nitrogen Cartridge (Part No. 29187) or
101.30 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15851) required.
tt101.10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge (Part No. 15850) required for actuation only.
NOTE: See System Selection Guide in Appendix Section for Cartridge Requirements
ACTUATION GAS LINE VATH AN
LT-20-R, LT-30-R, 101.10 OR 101.20
MAX. LENGTH OF 20 FT. (8 m),
MAX. NO. OF FITTINGS 9
REGULATED
RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation
and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mecha-
nism regulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each
agent tank. These limitations should be considered when
selecting the component mounting locations.
Actuation Gas Line — 6 Tanks Maximum
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva-
nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated
release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected
within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line
from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actu-
ator assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using
an LT-20-R (Part No. 7032), an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge
Part No. 5373), or a 101-10 (Part No. 15850) or a 101-20
Part No. 17492) carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 59.
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATIONGASLINELENGTHTOTALS
FIGURE 59
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
Continued)
Actuation Gas Line — 6 Tanks Maximum (Continued)
3. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total com-
bined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must
not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen
cartridge (Part No. 73022) or a 101-30 carbon dioxide car-
tridge (Part No. 15851). See Figure 60.
4. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one
901 elbow.
SAFETY
RELIEF
VALVE
ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES
WITH A "DOUBLE TANK" CARTRIDGE
OR A 101.30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m)
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9
EXPELLANT
GAS LINE
1
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
WITH TANK
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-27
REV. 1
Actuation Gas Line — 10 Tanks Maximum
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva-
nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101
remote mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actu-
ator assembly. The total length of the actuation gas line from
the remote mechanical release to the regulated actuator
assemblies must not exceed 100 ft. (30.5 m).
3. A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used in
these lines. Two 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow. See
Figure 61.
4. Use only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge (Part No. 15850)
in the 101 remote mechanical release.
5. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the
actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after
actuation.
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ANSUL AUTOMAN"
REGULATED
RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
114 IN. ACTUATION LINE -
100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM
REGULATED
RELEASE
ASSEMBLY-
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS.
AGENT TANK
9 TEES MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM OF FIVE
REGULATED ACTUATORS
FIGURE 60
20 ELBOWS
MAXIMUM
REMOTE RELEASE
MECHANISMS
PART NO. 32381)
5 MAXIMUM
FIGURE 61
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-28
REV. 1
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
Continued)
Expellant Gas Line
1. The expellant gas line piping is installed from the regulated
release mechanism in double and multiple -tank systems,
and from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple -tank
systems. The expellant gas line is the piping between the
regulator and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket assembly.
The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated
release mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly
must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank"
cartridge (Part No. 73022), an LT-A-101-30 Cartridge (Part
No. 29187), or a 101-30 Cartridge (Part No. 15851). See
Figures 62 and 63.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9
2. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one
900 elbow.
3. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly
in a multiple -tank system arrangement, the total combined
length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not
exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen
cartridge (Part No. 73022), an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen car-
tridge (Part No. 29187) or a 101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge
Part No. 15851). See Figure 60.
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter-
mined, it is then necessary to determine the piping configura-
tions between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This
section contains the guidelines and limitations for designing the
distribution piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from
the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also
be referred to when selecting the mounting location for the regu-
lated release mechanism and agent tank.
General Piping Requirements
1. All R-102 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need
for critical lengths and balancing is minimized.
2 Two 45° elbows count as one 900 elbow.
3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and
all fittings within the branch line itself.
4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from
ANsuL AUTOMAN••
REGULATED RELEASE the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or
ASSEMBLY wok must be 6 ft. (1.8 m).
5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center
of fitting. See Figure 64.
FIGURE 62
FIGURE 63
CENTER TO CENTER
FIGURE 64
6. All distribution piping must be Schedule 40 black iron,
chrome -plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped
galvanized pipe on the distribution piping.
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Supply and Branch Line Identification
The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down into four
specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the
Plenum Branch Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See
Figure 65.
DUCT BRANCH
t3LINE
SUPPLY
LINE r
PLENUM APPLIANCE
BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE
NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY.
THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION.
FIGURE 65
NOTE: THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED.
END OF SUPPLY LINE
END OF SUPPLY LINE
v
END OF SUPPLY LINE
BRANCH LINE CANNOT START
AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 7-1-94 Page 4-29
END OF SUPPLY LINE
I
END OF SUPPLY LINE
0 (
NOZZLES FOR
SUPPLY LINE TEE PLENUM
PROTECTION)
1 ^ NOZZLES FOR
PLENUM
PROTECTION)
BRANCH LINE CANNOT START
AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE.
FIGURE 66
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-30
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued)
SUPPLY LINE
The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from
the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, ap-
pliance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line fit-
tings except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines.
See Figures 65 and 66.
NOTICE
Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply
line tee.
DUCT BRANCH LINE
The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs
from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch
line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch
line. See Figures 65 and 67.
DUCT BRANCH LINE
ELBOW INCLUDED)
V
DUCT BRANCH LINE
TEE INCLUDED)
r
4
v
DUCT BRANCH LINES N,,
TEES INCLUDED)
v
i
I
FIGURE 67
PLENUM BRANCH LINE
The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes
all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start
the branch line. See Figures 65 and 68.
r
4
j PLENUM BRANCH LINE
1 (TEE INCLUDED)
I
PLENUM BRANCH LINE
rEE INCLUDED)
FIGURE 68
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE
The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes 1
all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start j
the branch line. See Figures 65 and 69.
i
I
I
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES
TEES INCLUDED)
FIGURE 69
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REOUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 1.5 Gallon System
OPTION 1 — DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION
1. Any combination of duct, plenum and/or appliance protec-
tion may be used with this option.
2. Only one duct branch line, with one nozzle, either a 1 W or
a 2W, may be used with this option.
3. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in.
Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel.
4. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow
numbers.'
5. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line
and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft.
2.4 m). When the supply line is split, the combined length
of both legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to
start of last branch line) must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). See
Figure 70.
6. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed
22 ft. (6.7 m). See Figure 71.
7. The requirements of the following table must not be
exceeded:
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-31
REV. 1
START OF LAST
BRANCH LINE
START OF FIRST
BRANCH LINE
SUPPLY \
LINE TEE
START OF FIRST START OF LAST
BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE
1 W NOZZLE
TOTAL LENGTH
MUST NOT
EXCEED 6 FT.
2.4 m)
FIGURE 70
COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT
BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) EXCEED 22 FT. (6.7 m)
FIGURE 71
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 10 ft.
12.2 m) (1.8 m) 1.2 m) 3 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft.
1.8 m) (1.2 m) 6 m) 6 m)
Maximum 900 Elbow 9 4 4 6
Maximum Tees 1 1 1 3
Maximum Flow Numbers 5' 2 2 3
Exceptions: 6 flow numbers are allowed when:
1. Duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping net-
work, or
11- 2. Only six (6) 1N nozzles". Pan No. 56930. are used, or
3. Only two (2) 3N nozzles. Pan No. 76762. are used.
Only five (5) flow numbers are allowed if a 1N nozzle is used for griddle
protection.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-32
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 1.5 Gallon System
Continued) 114
DIS
OPTION 2 — DUCT AND PLENUM PROTECTION ONLY PIP
1. Up to three nozzles, either 1 W or 2WH, may be used with
this option for duct protection, however, only two duct
nozzles may be used on a single branch line.
2. 1W and 2WH nozzles cannot be mixed on the same duct
branch line.
3. Whenever two duct nozzles are used on the same branch
line, the flow must enter the bull (side) and exit the ends
of the last tee in the branch line to assure balanced flow
to each duct nozzle.
4. Appliance branch lines are not allowed with this option.
5. All distribution piping must be only 1/4 In. Schedule 40
black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel. Use a 3/8 in.
nipple and a 3/8 in. x 1/4 in. reducing fitting for tank adaptor
connection to distribution piping. See Figure 72.
6. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line
and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft.
2.4 m). See Figure 73. When the supply line is split, the
combined length of both legs of the supply line (start of
first branch line to start of last branch line) must not exceed
8 ft. (2.4 m). See Figure 70.
7. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed
16 ft. (4.9 m). See Figure 73.
START OF LAST
BRANCH LINE
iT NOT
1)
114 IN.
DISTRIBUTION
2WH NOZZLES
I
IN NOZZLES
BRANCH LINES IN BOLD)
COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT
EXCEED 19 FT. (4.9 m)
iURE 72
FIGURE 73
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded
System
1. All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40.
2. See Figure 74b for tank connections.
3. The length of supply line piping between the start of the
first branch line and the start of the last branch line must
not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 74a. When the supply
line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply
line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the
last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m).
4. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed
36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 74a.
5. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed.
6. The requirements of the following table must not be
exceeded.
0.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-34.1
LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT
EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) FROM
START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE
TO START OF LAST BRANCH LINE
2WH NOZZLES
BRANCH LINES IN BOLD)
COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT
EXCEED 36 FT. (10.9 m)
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 32 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft.
9.7 m) 2.4 rn) 1.2 m) 3.7 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft.
1.8 m) 1.2 rn) 6 m) 6 m)
Maximum 900 8 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Tees 2 2 1 4
Maximum Flow 22 4 2 4
Numbers
FIGURE 74a
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-34.2
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded
System (Continued)
This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are
connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from
a single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the
regulated release assembly. See Figure 74b.
318 IN.
3/8IN. BRANCH
USE HOSE/GROMMET 318 IN. SUPPLY
PACKAGE. SUPPLY
PART NO. 418511
1 (
21 5 .5 cmcm) t31UIN. 318 IN. SPPLY
BRANCH GALLON
I I GALLON TANK3.
0 GALLON RELEASE ASSEMBLY TANK/
ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
DOUBLE
TANK NITROGEN
CARTRIDGE PART
NO. 73022) Independent
pipe runs can also be used with the regulated release
assembly and the tank/enclosure assembly. See Figure 74c.
HOSE/
GROMMET PACKT(
PACKAGE
PART
NO.
41\ 3.0
GALLON 1 3.
0
GALLON TANK TANK
OR OR
1.5
GALLON 1.5 GALLON TANK TANK
TANKIENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
DOUBLE
TANK
NITROGEN CATRIDGE
PART NO.
73022 OR 101.30
CO2 CARTRIDGE PART
NO.
15851 FIGURE 74b
I FIGURE 74c 11
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 1.5 Gallon System
Continued)
8. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of six flow numbers.
9. The requirements of the following table must not be
exceeded:
Duct
Requirements Supply Branch Line
Pipe Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft. 6 ft.
12.2 m) 1.8 m)
Maximum Rise 12 ft. 4 ft.
3.6 m) 1.2 m)
Maximum 900 9 4
Elbows
Maximum Tees 1 2
Maximum Flow 6 4*
Numbers
NOTE: A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-33
REV. 1
Plenum Appliance
Branch Line Branch Line
1/4 in.
6 ft. Not Allowed
1.8 m)
2 ft. Not Allowed
6 m)
3 Not Allowed
1 Not Allowed
2 Not Allowed
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-34
REV. 1
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements — 3.0 Gallon System
1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch
line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed
24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined
total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the
first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not
exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 74.
2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft.
10.9 m). See Figure 74.
3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8
in. supply line.
4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line.
5. The requirements of the following table must not be
exceeded:
LINE MUST NOT EXCEED
24 FT. (7.3 m)
1N NOZZLE
1/2N NOZZLE
BRANCH LINE IN BOLD)
COMBINED LENGTH MUST
NOT EXCEED 36 FT. (10.9 m)
FIGURE 74
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft.
12.2 m) 2.4 m) 1.2 m) 3.7 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft.
1.8 m) 1.2 m) 6 m) 6 m)
Maximum 900 9 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Tees 1 2 1 4
Maximum Flow 11' 4 2 4
Numbers
Elteeptlona: 1. 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a Combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle. one (1) 112N electrostatic precipitator nozzle. one (1) 1N plenum nozzle. and
four (4) two -flow appliance nozzles.
2. 12 flow numbers are allowed:
a. In any one tank not containing two -flow appliance nozzles", or
b. to any one tank using only two -flow appliance nozzles.
Only eleven (11) flow numbers are allowed if a 1N nozzle is used for griddle protection.
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Once the fire suppression system design has been determined,
a detection system design must be completed. This section con-
tains guidelines and limitations for detection system installation.
Detector Identification
The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other
by their location in the detection system.
1. The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368)
is the last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used
in a single -detector system. This detector is thus named
because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or
terminates."
2. A Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any
detector located in -line between the regulated release mech-
anism and the terminal detector.
Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity
The quantity of detectors used in the system will vary depending
on the style of detector used.
1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per
system must be within the approved system guidelines. The
following requirements must not be exceeded:
Maximum Maximum Maximum
Number of Number of Length of 1/2
Detectors Elbows in. Conduit
per System per System per System
Clip on Style 12 18 125 ft.(38.1 m)
Detector
Hinge Style 5 8 103 ft.(31.3 m)
Detector
Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft.(45.7 m)
Detector
2. If styles of detectors are mixed within a system, 4 series
and 1 terminal is the maximum number allowed.
NOTICE
When using the "clip -on" style detector, the
terminal detector may use the "hinged" style
mounting bracket with the "clip -on" style
linkage. This is only allowed with the terminal
detector. When using this option, the total
number of "clip -on" style detectors (11 series
and 1 terminal) is still allowed.
3. If detector styles are mixed in the detection system, the max-
imum length of wire rope must not exceed 103 ft. (31.4 m)
and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed
8.
4. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five
101 Remote Releases (Part No. 12029) can be used for
system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use
of a maximum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and
1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-35
Detector Placement Requirements
EXHAUST DUCTS
Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in
the duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors,
or at a maximum of 20 ft. (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See
Figure 75.
FIGURE 75
NOTICE
When gas appliances are used and the flue
gases from the burner are exhausted into the
duct, the detector must be kept out of the air
stream of these exhaust gases. These gases
can be very hot and could actuate the system
unnecessarily.
Duct openings that are long and narrow or
large enough to require multiple duct nozzles
may require additional detectors.
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of
the exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the
precipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the
duct, just above the precipitator. See Figure 76.
When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make
certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator.
1<
FIGURE 76
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-36
DETECTOR SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued)
COOKING APPLIANCES
If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where
a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to
utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the
detector is not more than 12 in. (30 cm) into the duct. See
Figure 77.
APPLIANCE
REOUIRES
SEPARATE
DETECTOR
APPLIANCE
COVERED BY
DETECTOR
UNDER DUCT
APPLIANCE
COVERED BY
DETECTOR
UNDER DUCT
APPLIANCE
REQUIRES
SEPARATE
DETECTOR
FIGURE 77
Detectors used for cooking appliances must be located above
the surface and within the perimeter of the cooking appliance.
They must be positioned toward the exhaust duct side of the
appliance and high enough to prevent accidental actuation of
the system. The cooking appliance detectors must be located
in the air stream of the cooking fumes for quick fire detection.
It is normally necessary to use one detector per area of single
nozzle coverage, even though more than one appliance may be
covered with a single nozzle.
Detection Line Requirements
CONDUIT
Rigid conduit, 1/2 inch Schedule 40 galvanized pipe, or 1/2 inch
EMT thin -wall conduit may be used. Standard steel conduit fit-
tings (compression type are recommended) must be employed
to properly install the detection system. All conduit or pipe must
be firmly supported. When using pipe, make certain that all ends
are carefully reamed, deburred and blown clear of chips and
scale before assembly.
NOTICE
The conduit offset can be used at the top or
bottom of the regulated release to change
direction of the conduit. The conduit offset
cannot be used with pulley tees. All other
changes in direction must be made by using
Ansul approved pulley elbows, Part No. 45771
or 415670. See Figure 78.
FIGURE 78
Fusible Link Selection
When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each
detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature
rating. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum
registering thermometer, Part No. 15240, temperature tape or
any other accurate thermometer.
O O
AN,1
TEMPERATURE RATING
STAMPED ON FUSIBLE
LINK BODY
K STYLE ML STYLE
SOD °F (2W "C) ONLY
FIGURE 79
Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in
detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below:
Temperature To Be Used Where
Fusible Link Rating Temperature Does
Part No. See Figure 79) Not Exceed
415739 165 OF 74 °C) 100 OF (38 °C)
415740 212 OF 100 °C) 150 OF (66 °C)
415741 280 OF 138 °C) 225 OF (107 °C)
415742 360 OF 182 °C) 290 OF (143 °C)
415743 450 OF 232 °C) 3e0 OF (182 °C)
56816 500 OF 260 °C) 400 OF (204 °C)
MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS
A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be
manually operated at some point distant from the regulated
release assembly. The pull station should be installed at a max-
imum height of 60 in. (152 cm) and located in the path of exit.
The pull station is the only source of manual actuation of the
regulated release assembly.
Two styles of remote pull stations are available: metal stamped
and plastic molded.
P. The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station
within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per
system is 20.
One pulley tee, Part No. 15342, is allowed per system.
Exception: When using a pulley tee, Part No. 15342, in the pull
station line, the maximum length of wire rope to each pull sta-
tion must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m) and the maximum number
of elbows must not exceed 18.
Metal Stamped Style — Part No. 4835 or 54011
Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote
manual pull station are:
Description Part No
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly' 54011
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835
Pulley Elbow 45771
Pulley Elbow 415670
Pulley Tee' ' 15342
Assembly includes parts listed below:
1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821
Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeves 4596
Glass Break Rod (1) 4834
Designed for 32 IF to 130 IF (0 °C to 54 °C) temperature areas. Utilized when two remote
manual pull stations are being connected to one regulated release assembly.
Plastic Molded Style — Part No. 415255
Parts that may be used for installation of a plastic molded remote
manual pull station are:
Description Part No.
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 415255
Trim Ring Shipping Assembly (25) 415256
Replacement Seal Shipping Assembly (25) 415317
1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 500 ft. (152 cm) 79653
Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeves 4596
Pulley Elbow 45771
Pulley Tee 15342
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS
An Ansul or Ansul approved mechanical gas shut-off valve
system can be attached to the R-102 system. The system works
both mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder
located inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation
of the fire suppression system, a pneumatically -operated air cyl-
inder assembly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve.
The total length of the cable for the mechanical gas valve must
not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows
that may be used is 20.
One pulley tee (Part No. 15342) is allowed per system.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-37
REV. 1
P. Exception: When using a pulley tee, Part No. 15342, the max-
imum length of wire rope to each gas valve must not exceed
125 ft. (38 m) and the maximum number of elbows must not
exceed 18.
Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut-
off Valve are:
Description Part No.
Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)' 55598
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (Ansul)' 55601
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)' 55604
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 112 in. Assembly (Ansul)' 55607
Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (Ansul)' 55610
Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)' 25937
Gas Valve/Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)' 25938
Pulley Elbow" 45771
Pulley Elbow" 415670
Pulley Tee' ' ' 15342
1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or
50 ft. (15 m) or 500 ft. (152 m) roll 79653
Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeve 4596
Stop Sleeve (2) 26317
Assemblies include pans listed below:
Approved for 700 IF (371 °C) temperature areas.
Used with two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN releases to operate one (1) mechanical gas valve.
Air Cylinder Assembly 15733
Air Cylinder 15521
Tubing Assembly 15529
Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525
Male Elbow 15523
Male Connector 15522
Machine Screw (2) 15421
Hex Nut (2) 15527
Lockwasher (2) 4141
Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197
All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be
mounted in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient
operating temperature range of all valves is 32 IF to 120 IF
0 °C to 49 °C). The valves are not weatherproof and must be
located indoors in areas approved by the "authority having
jurisdiction."
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS
A UL Listed electrically -operated gas shut-off valve can be
attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of
shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric
gas shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached with
both an electric (snap -action) switch and a manual reset relay.
For more information on the types of electric (snap -action)
switches, refer to the Electrical Switch, Field Installation sec-
tion on Page 5-24. The manual reset relay is reviewed in this
section.
All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
jurisdiction.
The following is a brief explanation of how the R-102 system
operates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached:
With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the
normally closed contacts in the snap -action switch allow current
to flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized,
normally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the sole-
noid in the gas valve to be energized.
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 4-38
REV. 1
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed con-
tacts in the snap -action switch will open, de -energizing the reset
relay. This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will
cause the gas valve to become de -energized and close.
The system must be re -armed and the "push to reset" button
on the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve.
It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power
interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the
system was not fired.
In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power
failure has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut-
off valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition.
For resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Proce-
dures" section In this manual.
Approvals
Ansul gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved
for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas
and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under
Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult
Ansul Fire Protection, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542.
If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically -
operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of
appropriate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz."
The information on temperature and type of gas that the valves
are suitable for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List
of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated
Valves Guide No. 440 A5."
The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that
needs to be energized to remain open.
Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut-
off Valve are:
Description Part No.
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT' 13707
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT' 13708
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT' 13709
Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT' 13710
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT' 17643
Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702
Valves ere normally closed when de -energized.
PRESSURE SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
The pressure switches for the R-102 system are specially
designed. The switches are intended for use with electric gas
valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
power shut-off devices, and other electrical devices that are
designed to shut off or turn on when the fire suppression system
is actuated.
Pressure Switches that may be used on system are:
Description Part No.
Single -Pole, Double -Throw'
Double -Pole, Double -Throw'
53133
24377
Rated for 20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC with 10 amp 125 VAC " L" 1 hp•1 t 5 VAC. 2 hp•230
VAC. 1/2 amp 125 VDC. 114 amp 250 VDC. A relay must be supplied by others if equipment
load exceeds the rated capacity of the switch.
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
The electric (snap -action) switches for the R-102 system are spe-
cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The
switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms,
contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off
devices, and other electrical devices that are designed to shut
off or turn on when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See
Figures 84 through 86 for reference.)
Contractors shall supply "UL listed, enclosed industrial control
equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of
the cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or 24 VAC/60 Hz."
All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
jurisdiction.
Electric (Snap -Action) Switches that may be used are:
Description Part No.
Single -Pole, Double -Throw Assembly' 15549
Assembly Includes:
Snap -Action Switch 17781
Wire Assembly Connector 17765
Self -Tapping Screws (2) 15609
Lock Nut 21918
Screw 415870
Double -Pole, Double -Throw Assembly' 32222
Assembly Includes:
Snap -Action Switch (2) 17781
Wire Assembly Connector (2) 17765
Self -Tapping Screws (2) 32085
Trip Lever Pin 415844
Lock Nut 21918
Three -Pole, Double -Throw Assembly' 415868
Assembly Includes:
Snap -Action Switch (3) 17781
Wire Assembly Connector (3) 17765
Machine Screw w/Hex Nut (2) 32221
Trip Lever Pin 415844
Lock Nut 21918
Four -Pole, Double -Throw Assembly' 32220
Assembly Includes:
Snap -Action Switch (4) 17781
Wire Assembly Connector (3) 17765
Machine Screw w/Hex Nut (2) 32221
Trip Lever Pin 415844
Lock Nut 21918
Rated for 15 amps. 113 hp, 125 or 250 VAC, with 1/2 amp 125 VDC and 114 amp 250 VDC.
A relay must be supplied by others, if equipment load exceeds the rated capacity of the switch.
Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance
with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of
the authority having jurisdiction.
If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system
shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the
requirements of the appropriate Signalling Standard (NFPA 71,
72A, 72B, 72C or 72D) so that the actuation of the extinguishing
system will sound the fire alarm as well as provide the extin-
guishing function of the system.
If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or
electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt
audible or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive
from alarms or indicators indicating operation or hazardous con-
ditions as specified in NFPA 17A.
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE -*"
ELECTRIC
SNAP -ACTION
SWITCH
BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SOURCE
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
A
JUNCTION BOXES
NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
MANUAL RESET RELAY
NOTE: DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION.
BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS. ETA.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
L1
BLACK 110V/60HZ
T RED L2
BROWN
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
PART NO. 15549
MANUAL RESET RELAY
PART NO. 14702
n
J--1-
K.
N.O. K1aT
y i PUSH BUTTONN.O. K SWITCHs
7 ------"J
I
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-39
MANUAL RESET
RELAY
ELECTRIC GAS VALVE
S VALVE
K1e and K1b are N.O. when K1 is de -energized.
NOTE:
1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
2. _ _ _ _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION.
3. GAS VALVES: "UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY -OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATUAL. OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF
APPROPRIRATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ" OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707,
13708. 13709. 13710, AND 17643.
GAS VALVE
SEE NOTE 3
FIGURE 80
SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN
U L EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-40
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric (110 VAC/SO Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SOURCE
FL1L2 /-
POWER SOURCE I 0 L/ RELAY
MANUAL RESET
ELECTRIC
SNAP -ACTION
SWITCH
JUNCTION BOX
NOT SUPPLIED BY.ANSUL) \ \
POWER O"FF
SWITCH
i (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
BLACK (HOT)
WHITE (NEUTRAL)
RED (COMMON)
U BROWN (N.C.)
O
m ? I T
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
MANUAL RESET RELAY
NOTE: DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION.
BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
L1
BLACK_ 110V/60HZ
RED L 2
BROWN
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH -
PART NO. 16649
CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
POWER ON -OFF
SWITCH (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
1 MANUAL RESET RELAY
PART NO. 14702
K 1.
I1
eN.O.
TKPUSH
K1bN.O.' iSWITCHUTTON illl
I aF__
J TO
POWER SUPPLY
220V/440V TO
HEATING ELEMENT
LOAD K1a
and K1b are N.O. when Kt Is dedner&9d. CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED) SEE
NOTE 3 r --- -
I
I
POWER ON -OFF I
i ' SWITCH (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) I
I
I I
I TO
POWER SUPPLY e-
t.— 220V/440V TO
HEATING - ELEMENTLOAD
NOTE:
I.
DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. _ _ _ _ _
DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3.
CONTRACTORS: " UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EOUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING
THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ." FIGURE
81
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 4-41
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE
ELECTRIC
SNAP -ACTION
SWITCH
JUNCTION BOX
NOT SUPPLIED BY AIISUL)
BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SOURCE
MANUAL RESET RELAY
L7 BLACK (HOT)
1
L2 WHITE (NEUTRAL) ,
2
RED (COMMON)
3)
1 BROWN (N.C.) n
g dmz
VAP-ACTION SWITCH
NOTE: DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION.
BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS. ETC.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
L1
BLACK 110V/60HZ
I—
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH RED L2
PART NO. 15549 I BROWN
SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
L1
110V/60HZ _
L2 —
MANUAL RESET
01 RELAY
O
SWITCH OR
THERMOSTAT
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
TO POWER
7
SUPPLY 220V/440V
I TO HEATING
Jr ELEMENT LOAD
K1a and K1b are N.O. when K1 Is de -energized.
1 MANUAL RESET RELAY
PART NO. 14702
Z`J-
3
y-
I K1.
I
1 NA. KeeT
4i PUSH BUTTON
K1bs N.O.
i
SWITCH
I R
CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
1 SEE NOTE 3
1
1
I
Lill
TO POWER
SUPPLY 220V1440V
TO HEATING
ELEMENT LOAD
NOTE:
1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
2. _ _ _ _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION.
3. CONTRACTORS: "UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING
MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ."
FIGURE 82
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must
have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank Quan-
tity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping, and
Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch
should be completed.
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS
For successful system performance, the regulated release
assembly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-
enclosure(s) or tank -bracket assembly(ies) used must be located
in areas where the air temperature will not fall below 32 OF
0 °C) or exceed 130 OF (54 °C). Also, the components must
be arranged to conform to the actuation and expellant gas line,
and the distribution piping guidelines noted in "System Design."
Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release
assembly (Part No. 79290 — 3.0 gallon mechanical or
79292 — 3.0 gallon electrical or 79291 — 1.5 gallon
mechanical or 79493 — OEM Release/Bracket
Assembly). The regulator in this assembly is specifically
designed to allow a regulated flow of expellant gas into
the agent tank(s). Absence of this regulator could cause
the tank(s) to rupture or create an improper system
discharge.
Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release
Assembly, and each regulated actuator assembly required
by completing the following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3.
a. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The
mounting locations must allow the regulated release
assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to
be within the limitation of the actuation and expellant
gas line lengths and must be able to support the weight
of the assembly(ies).
b. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank
from enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from
the tank/adaptor assembly.
c. Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location
using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type
of fasteners depending on the mounting surface.
d. When mounting a 6-gallon manifolded system (or a 6-
gallon individual piped system) it is critical that each
mounting box is located as shown in Figure 3a. There
must be a 5/16 in. space between each box. Less than
5/16 in. will cause interference with the covers, and
more than a 5/16 in. will cause a gap between the two
hose grommets which will expose the hose to possible
tampering or damage.
Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the
ANSUL AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in.
knockout in the right side of the tank -enclosure box.
Install grommets in each (use Ansul hose/grommet
package, Part No. 418511). Remove 1/4 in. plug from
back side of R-102 regular and install fixed end of
secondary expellant gas hose (included in
hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511) in 1/4 in.
regulator outlet and wrench tighten.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-1
REV. 1
If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid sur-
face using appropriate fasteners.
Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on
Page 5-3.
Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten
into 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the
tank/enclosure assembly. Also install hose to tank
adaptor in regulated release and wrench tighten. See
Figure 74b for details of hose routing.
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
16 1/2 IN.
42 cm)
13 13116
22 112 IN.
57 cm)
19 1/16 IN.
48.4 cm)
j —>'
7 1/2 IN.
19 cm)
FIGURE
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
16 1/2 IN.
412 cm)
13 13116 IN.
35 cm)
0
22 1/2 IN.
i I (57 cm)
0 19 1/16 IN.
7 1/2 IN.
FIGURE 2
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-2
REV. 1
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
7.0 6.0
18 cm)r(15 cm)
1.0 r pC
c
38 Q
r Q
18.5
47 cm)
15.0
38 cm)
62
62
MULTIPLE TANK ASSEMBLY
6 5116 IN. 3 118 IN.
06 cm) (8 cm)
13 13/16 IN.
LOCATION OF P25 cm)
GROMMETS
19 7116 IN.
I 1
49 cm)
I
FIGURE 3
19 7/16 IN.
I (49 cm)
5/16 IN. .28 IN. (.7 cm)
8 cm) HOLE (7YP)
FIGURE 3a
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated.
2. Mount each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly by
completing the following steps:
a. Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the
enclosure or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon
tank is taller than the bracket. Allow sufficient space
for convenient piping and removal.)
b. Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure
enclosure or bracket to the mounting location using the
four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners
depending on the mounting surface.
3 112 IN.
9 cm)
9 314 IN.
25 cm)
8 5/8 IN.
22 cm)
7 13116 IN.
20 cm)
9 IN.
cm)
r(22.9
Imo_
r+6 5116 IN.
i (16 cm)
I
I 1/2 IN.
57 .2 cm)
19 7/16 IN.
49.4 cm))
71121N.
19.1 cm)
FIGURE 4
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-2.1
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)
3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps:
a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill
opening. Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine
bursting disc is in place and that silver side is away from
tank. See Figure 5.
a
FIGURE 5
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer oper-
ations of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppres-
sant. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of
contact, flush immediately with water for 15 minutes.
If irritation persists, contact a physician. Do not take
internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting.
Dilute with water or milk and contact a physician
immediately.
Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5
gallons (5.8 L) or 3 gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX
Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. When the tank con-
tains a complete charge, the liquid level should be 1
in. t 1/8 (2.54 cm f .3 cm) from the bottom of the
fill opening. See Figure 6.
Make certain tank is filled to 1 in. t 1/8 in. (2.54
cm f .3 cm). DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may
result in agent entering gas hoses and regulator
potentially causing system malfunction.
1 in. ; 1/8
2.54 cm i .3 cm)
FIGURE 6
c. Reinstall adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening
until metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom
of adaptor and tank collar.
4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-3
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE
Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the piping
design must be determined; and the regulated release assembly,
each regulated actuator assembly and each tank -bracket
assembly should be'securely mounted.
General Piping Requirements
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron,, hot -dipped galva-
nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all
ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and
scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe
tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male
thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise
around the threads, away from the pipe opening.
NOTICE
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe.opening,
as this could cause possible blockage of the
gas pressure.
Thread sealant or compound must not be
used.
4. When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping,
install a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassembly
later.
Actuation Gas Line
Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism
high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through
the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet.
Install the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attach-
ment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required
to connect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7.
Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
e s s
I
Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
TO TANK IN
VT109 IN
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
TO REGULATED ACTUATOR
MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN
BRACKET OR
ENCLOSURE
2 IN.
NIPPLE
REOUIRED
TO TANK IN
ntLwLA i to RELEASE REOULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
TO REGULATED ACTUATOR
MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY)
TO TANK IN
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE
MULTIPLE TANKS WITH PRESSURE TANKS WITH
SWITCH CONNECTION PRESSURE SWITCH
CONNECTION
NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, HOT -TIPPED GALVA• FIGURE 7
NIZED, CHROME -PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL.
10
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-4
REV. 1
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE
Continued)
Actuation Gas Line (Continued)
2. Run piping up through the regulated release assembly
enclosure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated
actuator assembly used within the system.
3. The total combined length of the actuation gas line from
the regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator
assemblies must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an
LT-20-R nitrogen cartridge (Part No.7032), an LT-30-R
nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 5373), a 101-10 CO2 cartridge
Part No. 15851), or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge (Part No.
17492). See Figure 8.
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R,
LT-30-R, 101.20 OR 101.30 CARTRIDGE.
MAXIMUM LENGTH - 20 FT. (6 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ANSUL AUTOMAN"
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH
A "DOUBLE -TANK" OR 101.30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m),
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9
4. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total com-
bined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must
not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 9.
5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one
900 elbow.
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT
INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS
LINE LENGTH TOTALS
FIGURE 8
I I REGULATED ACTUATOR
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT
GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED
IN COMBINED TOTALS
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED FIGURE 9RELEASEASSEMBLY
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE
Continued) 4.
Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly
Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly
regulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps:
The regulated release assembly is shipped with a factory -
installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one
at the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet con-
nects the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is
mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with
a 1/4 in. plug.
Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted
inside the enclosure. If a pressure switch is required, a 1/4
in. x 1/8 in. reducing fitting will be required for connection
between the back regulator outlet and the pressure switch.
See Figure 7.
DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANK SYSTEMS:
If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional
tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is being installed,
the plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See
Figure 6 for proper connections to the regulator.)
3. Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back
outlet through one of the knockouts provided in the
enclosure.
The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated
release assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using
a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge (Shipping Part No.
73022) or a 101-30 CO2 cartridge (Shipping Part No. 15851).
See Figure 10.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m).
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 10
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-5
REV. 1
If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total com-
bined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m)
when using a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge (Shipping
Part No. 73022) or a 101-30 CO2 cartridge (Shipping Part
No. 15851). See Figure 9.
5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one
900 elbow.
Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator Assembly
Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly
regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by
completing the following steps:
1. The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory -installed
regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 1350 from
each other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the
other contains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank
which will be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expel-
lant gas hose to the agent tank that is mounted inside the
enclosure.
2. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet
and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator
through the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank -
enclosure or tank -bracket assembly. A maximum of one
tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is allowed per
regulated actuator assembly.
The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu-
lated actuator to the tank -bracket assembly must not
exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 11.
3. A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900
elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 901 elbow.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m).
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 11
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-6
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE
Continued)
Actuation Gas Line From 101 Remote Release(s) to Regu-
lated Actuators
Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the
regulated actuators by completing the following:
1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in
the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided
in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actu-
ator assembly.
The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the
remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed
100 ft. (30.5). See Figure 12.
2. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in
the actuation piping. Two 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow.
See Figure 12.
3. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in
the actuation piping. See Figure 12.
SAFETY RELIEF
VALVE
9 TEES
20 ELBOWS
MAXIMUM )
MAXIMUM
1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE - 100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM
f REMOTE RELEASE
REGULATED AGENT MECHANISMS
ACTUATOR TANK (5 MAXIMUM)
WITH TANK
FIGURE 12
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-7
INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping
design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel-
lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actu-
ator, and each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly should
already be installed.
These installation instructions are identical for single, double,
and multiple -tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and
hazard areas to be covered.
General Piping Requirements
1. Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless
steel pipe and fittings.
NOTICE
Do not use hot -dipped galvanized iron pipe or
fittings in the agent distribution piping.
2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all
ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and
scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
3. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in
the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. When
applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap
the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads,
away from the pipe opening.
NOTICE
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening
as the pipe and nozzles could become
plugged.
Thread sealant or compound must not be
used as it could plug the nozzles.
4. Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent
tanks may be manifolded together and run to the predeter-
mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the
same cartridge may be manifolded.
NOTICE
Closely follow the piping requirements for
each size system, as detailed in the "System
Design" section, when installing distribution
piping.
Piping Installation
1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on
the tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to
conform to the distribution piping.
2. Based on the piping sketch developed in the "System
Design" section of this manual, install the supply line and
position the tees at points where branch lines must be
installed. See Figure 13.
r-------- L-----------
i
FIGURE 13
3. Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each
nozzle. (Make certain all fittings are tight and all piping is
securely bracketed.) The 1 WS and 1 NS nozzles can be
aimed by slipping a 3/8 in. Schedule 40 pipe over the tip,
moving the tip to the correct aiming point, and then wrench
tightening the retaining ring.
4 All threaded connections located in the protected area, must
be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male
threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the
end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage
of the agent distribution.
5. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small
amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the
opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating
the exterior of the blow -off cap. This will help keep cooking
grease from building up on the cap.
NOTICE
When using a metal blow -off cap, make cer-
tain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal
cap.
6. Make certain a blow -off cap is in place over each nozzle
tip. These blow -off caps are designed to keep grease from
building -up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent
flow. See Figure 14.
I /
FIGURE 14
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-8
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM
Before the following procedures can be completed, the detec-
tion design must already be completed. These installation
instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank
systems except for the number of hazard areas to be covered.
NOTICE
Inform customer that fusible links should not
be exposed to ammonia -based chemical
cleaners or steam.
1. Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design"
section, mount the detectors in their predetermined
locations.
2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism
trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected
for mounting the detectors.
When changing the direction of conduit, use only Ansul
pulley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release,
it is acceptable to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly" (Part
No. 79825).
Ansul offers three styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part
No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip -on" style series and ter-
minal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use
a "clip -on" style linkage assembly and do not require the
wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while
it is being fed through the detection system.
Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series
and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assem-
blies use a detector linkage assembly which requires the
wire rope to be threaded through each linkage assembly
while the rope is being fed through the detection system.
Part No. 417368 and 417369 are the "scissor" style series
and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assem-
blies use a detector linkage assembly which does not
require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage
assembly while it is being fed through the detection system.
Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage
1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two
1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector
bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the
terminal detector bracket. See Figure 15.
COMPRESSION FITTING NUT-
1/2 IN.STEEL
COMPRESSION FITTING
FIGURE 15
NOTICE
Do not use zinc die cast compression con-
nectors on the detection conduit lines as these
will not withstand the normally high tempera-
tures experienced in the plenum area.
2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening,
secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as
shown in Figure 16.
FIGURE 16
3. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed the wire
rope through the hole in the regulated release mechanism
locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down.
Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.)
See Figure 17.
FIGURE 17
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-9
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued)
4. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel
wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector
brackets to the terminal detector.
NOTICE
If wire rope requires splicing, make certain
splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from
any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid
interference.
Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket
as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the ter-
minal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening,
and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8
cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the
National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve
Tool (Stock No: 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the
stop sleeve.
FIGURE 18
FIGURE 19
2.3 IN.
5-8 cm)
6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installa-
tion of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other
weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope,
leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the
locking clamp and the weighted device.
NOTICE
When attaching the weighted device to the
excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8
cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for
proper installation.
Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be
approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope
between the locking clamp and the weighted
device, which will be utilized when the linkage
is put in place.
7. Starting at the terminal detector, place the small tab of the
detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 21.
FIGURE 21
8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and snap
the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22.
FIGURE 20
FIGURE 22
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-10
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued)
9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on
the opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until
it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23.
FIGURE 23
NOTICE
The hook portions of the detector linkage
should now face away from each other.
10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upsidedown,
with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See
Figure 24.
FIGURE 24
11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves
together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly
rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks.
See Figure 25.
12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket.
See Figure 26. (For optimum detection, make certain the
solder joint is in the down position.)
BRACKET
T
FIGURE 26
NOTICE
When positioning the linkage in the bracket,
it is recommended to locate the linkage
slightly off center, toward the terminal detector
side.
13. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible
link in the remainder of the detector brackets.
14. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the regu-
lated release mechanism, with the movable flange resting
securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and
spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging
the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release mech-
anism. See Figure 27.
COCKIN
ING PIN
FIGURE 27
FIGURE 25
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-11
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued)
15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking
pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath
the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 28.
FIGURE 28
16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985)
on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered
projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking
position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actu-
ated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar
is removed.) See Figure 29.
WON-.
iR
ILY INSTALLED
FIGURE 29
17. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See
Figure 30.
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
FIGURE 30
18. Verity each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible
link, is in the detector bracket, located slightly toward the
terminal detector side.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between the trip
hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only
the particular fusible link(s) selected for instal-
lation in each detector, including terminal
detector, to ensure correct adjustment when
performing Steps 19 and 20.
19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull
all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking
clamp.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 7-1-94 Page 5-12
REV. 1
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued)
20. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the
base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that
there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance between
the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever
assembly. See Figure 31. (If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) minimum, raise tension lever, loosen set screws on
locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20.)
114 IN. MINIMUM
6.4 mm)
TRIP
NAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 31
NOTICE
Do not use zinc die cast compression con-
nectors on the detection conduit lines as these
will not withstand the normally high tempera-
tures experienced in the plenum area.
2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening,
secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as
shown in Figure 33.
Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actua-
tion could caMuse system discharge. 3•
21. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and
Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of
this manual.
22. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope
in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately
2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device.
Scissor" Style Linkage Installation
1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two
1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector
bracket or the single 1 /2 in. steel compression fitting on the
terminal detector bracket. See Figure 32.
COMPRESSION
FITTING NUT
112 IN. STEEL
COMPRESSION
FITTING
FIGURE 32
FIGURE 33
Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through
the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing
the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set
screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 34.
FIGURE 34
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-13
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued)
4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope
through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets
to the terminal detector.
NOTICE
If wire rope requires splicing, make certain
splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from
any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid
interference.
5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket
as shown in Figure 35 or as shown in Figure 36 if the ter-
minal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening,
and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8
cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 37. Use the
National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve
Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the
stop sleeve.
FIGURE 35
FIGURE 36
2-3 IN.
5-8 cm)
FIGURE 37
6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installa-
tion of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other
weighted device' on the excess stainless steel wire rope,
leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the
locking clamp and the weighted device.
NOTICE
When attaching the weighted device to the
excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8
cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for
proper installation.
Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be
approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope
between the locking clamp and the weighted
device, which will be utilized when the linkage
is put in place.
7. Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 38.
Note that the ANSUL AUTOMAN release is located on the
left side of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp the two
assembly "boot -hooks" over the cable with pliers so the
cable is captured under each hook but the whole assembly
can move from side to side. Center the assembly in the
detector bracket.
FIGURE 38
B. Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release side
of the hook assemby, then pull the fusible link to the oppo-
site side and complete the hookup as shown in Figure 39
and 40. The top of the hook assembly must be inside the
bracket stiffeners. The hook assembly with the fusible link
in place must be located toward the terminal detector side
of the bracket.
GI/J Inc 9n
FIGURE 40
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-14
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued)
9. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible
link in the remainder of the detector brackets.
10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the
release mechanism, with the movable flange resting
securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and
spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging
the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism.
See Figure 41.
cx
PIN
FIGURE 41
11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking
pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath
the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 42.
FIGURE 42
12. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985)
on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered
projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking
position. (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor
can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is
removed.) See Figure 43.
00K BAR
3ROPERLY
NSTALLED
FIGURE 43
13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See
Figure 44.
TENSION LEVER
IN " LIP"POSITION
FIGURE 44
14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible
link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the ter-
minal detector side.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between the trip
hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only
the particular fusible link(s) selected for instal- .
lation in each detector, including terminal
detector, to ensure correct adjustment when
performing Steps 15 and 16.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-15
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued)
15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull
all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking
clamp.
16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the
base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that
there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance between
the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever
assembly. See Figure 45. (If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) minimum, raise tension lever, loosen set screws on
locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.)
114 IN. (6.4 mm)
MINIMUM
TRIP HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 45
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu-
ation could cause system discharge.
17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and
Placing in Service Section, Page 7-1 — 7-3, of this manual.
18. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope
in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately
2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device.
Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage
1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 in. steel
compression fittings. Thread the compression fitting into the
detector bracket and then secure by using the lock nut sup-
plied with the fitting. See Figure 46.
1/2 IN. STEEL
COMPRESSION
RT/TINGS
1/2 IN. COMPRESSION/
FITTING NUT
FIGURE 46
2.
NOTICE
Do not use zinc die cast compression con-
nectors on the detection conduit lines as zinc
will not withstand the normally high tempera-
tures experienced in the plenum area.
Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed wire rope
up through hole in regulated release mechanism locking
clamp, allowing excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not
tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure
47. r
LAMP
FIGURE 47
3. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel
wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and to the first
detector.
4. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, feed the wire
rope through the detector linkage assembly. See Figure 48.
5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and
pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage
assembly at each additional bracket.
6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal
detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. (5-8 cm) of wire rope
to extend beyond the clamping device and wrench tighten
the set screws. See Figure 48.
2-3 IN.
5—B cm)
FIGURE 48
7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during posi-
tioning of the detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other
weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope,
leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the
locking clamp and the weighted device.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-16
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued)
NOTICE
When attaching the weighted device to the
excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8
cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for
proper installation.
Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be
approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope
between the locking clamp and the weighted
device, which will be utilized when the linkage
is put in place.
8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage
together and place the correctly rated Ansul approved
fusible link over both detector hooks. For optimum detec-
tion, make certain the solder joint is in the down position.
Locate the linkage in the center of the detector bracket. See
Figure 49.
Eurt.i i
o
F:W,:,A ICI
FIGURE 49
9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul approved
fusible links on the detector hooks and position the linkage
in the center of each bracket.
10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of regu-
lated release mechanism with the movable flange resting
securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring
housing, with the notched lever portion engaging the
cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release. See
Figure 50.
COCK
CING PIN
FIGURE 50
11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the
cocking pin until trip hammer indented surface moves
underneath the pin. See Figure 51.
FIGURE 51
12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No.
14985) on left side of cable lever, over the two shouldered
projecting stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into
the locking position. (The regulated release mechanism
cannot be actuated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced
until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 52.
BAR
ERLY INSTALLED
FIGURE 52
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-17
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) TRIP
Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued)
13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See
Figure 53.
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
FIGURE 53
14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible
link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between the trip
hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only
the particular fusible link(s) selected for the
installation in each detector, including the ter-
minal detector, to ensure correct adjustment
when performing Steps 15 and 16.
15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull
all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking
clamp.
16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the
base of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there
is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance between the base
of trip hammer assembly and cable lever assembly. See
Figure 54. (If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum,
raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and
repeat Steps 15 and 16.)
1/4 IN. MINIMUM
6.4 mm)
TRIP
HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 54
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge or do not remove lock bar at this time
as an accidental actuation could cause system discharge.
17. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and
Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of
this manual.
18. When all testing has been completed in the "Testing and
Placing in Service" section, cut off excess wire rope in the
regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in.
5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-18
REV. 1
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
To install a remote manual pull station complete the following
steps:
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within
the regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release assembly
is in the cocked position.
If regulated release assembly does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting
the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull sta-
tion should be determined in accordance with authority
having jurisdiction.
The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull
station within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used
per system is 20 of Part No. 45771 or 415670.
Exception: When using a pulley tee, Part No. 15342, in the
pull station line, the maximum length of wire rope to each
pull station must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m) and the max-
imum number of elbows must not exceed 18.
4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction
box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted,
with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station
cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right
side up and readable.
ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION:
a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on
back of each cover assembly.
b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected
location so that printing is right side up and readable.
5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required),
and pulley elbows from each pull station to regulated release
assembly as necessary. See Figure 55 or 56.
If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between the regu-
lated release assembly and first pulley elbow. The ambient
temperature range of the pulley tee is between 32 OF to
130 OF (0 °C to 54 °C).
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION
O° PULLEY ELBOW
WIRE ROPE
RELEASE
OVAL SLEEVE MECHANISM
CABLE /
LEVER
f
REMOTE `
MANUAL
PULL LOCK BAR
STATION
BREAK ROD
PULL
IISIDESTUD
g
RING
JUNCTION BOX HANDLE
NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
FIGURE 55
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION
PULLEY TEE PULLEY EL/BOW
OVAL SLEEVE
RELEASE
MECHANISM
CABLEEVER I
LOCK BAR
JUNCTION BOX REMOTE
NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) MANUAL
PULL
STATION
FIGURE 56
6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and
each pulley elbow to cable lever located at regulated release
assembly.
NOTICE
Make certain that wire rope rides on top and
in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m)
wire rope has been spliced to accommodate
a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to
be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow
or conduit adaptor.
7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junc-
tion box is used).
8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope
through cable lever guide holes and back through the oval
crimp sleeve. See Figure 55.
9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the
National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve
Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop
sleeve.) See Figure 55.
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued)
Molded Plastic Style
To install a remote manual pull station complete the following
steps:
1. Make certain the regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within
the regulated release mechanism. See Figure 57.
I BAR
ERLYINSTALLED
FIGURE 57
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify cartridge has been removed from regulated release
assembly and regulated release assembly is in the cocked
position.
3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting
the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull sta-
tion should be determined in accordance with authority
having jurisdiction.
The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull
station within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used
per system is 20 of the high temperature pulley elbows, Part
No. 45771. This is the only style elbow approved for use
with this pull station.
Exception: When using a pulley tee, Part No. 15342, in the
pull station line, the maximum length of wire rope to each
pull station must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m) and the max-
imum number of elbows must not exceed 18.
4. Pull station can be surface mounted or flush mounted. In
either case, a 4 in., octagonal, Raco No. 165 or equal junc-
tion box must be used. This style junction box is 2 1/8 in.
5.4 cm) deep, which is required for proper installation of
this type pull station. If flush mounted, the junction box must
stick out 1/4 to 5/16 in. (.6 to .8 cm) from the finished wall
surface to accommodate the trim ring and cover. See Figure
58. The trim ring is used only when the pull station is flush
mounted to cover up the hole cut in the wall.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-19
REV. 1
114 - 5/181N.
8 - .8 Cm)
FINISHED WALL
PULL STATION
MOUNTING HOLE
UPPER RIGHT)
MOUNTING HOLES
CAN ALSO BE
LOCATED IN UPPER
LEFT AND
LOWER RIGHT
PULL STATION MOUNTING
HOLE (LOWER LEFT)
FIGURE 58
5. Mount the junction box. Location of mounting holes for pull
station cover can be either in the upper right and lower left
or upper left and lower right. See Figure 58.
6. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required),
and pulley elbow(s) from each pull station to the regulated
release assembly as necessary. See Figure 59. Do not
exceed maximum length of wire rope or maximum number
of elbows.
PULLEY ELBOW
OVAL SLEEVE
CABLE LEVER JI
LOCK BAR 4
JUNCTION BOX RELEASE
NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) MECHANISM
PULLEY TEE PULLEY ELBOW
JUNCTION BOX
NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) FIGURE 59
If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between the regu-
lated release assembly and the first pulley elbow.
Select the two mounting bosses on the back of the cover
which match up with the mounting holes on the junction box
and drill out the blind hole, using a 3/16 diameter drill bit.
Attach pull station cover and trim ring (if necessary) to junc-
tion box using two, 8-32 x 3/8 in. (.9 cm) long screws (sup-
plied with junction box). Make certain wording on cover is
oriented in the correct position. See Figure 60.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
U L EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-20
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued)
Molded Plastic Style (Continued)
DRILL OUT BLIND HOLE
IN MOUNTING BOSSES USING
3/16 IN. DIAMETER DRILL BIT
r 6-32z3!6IN.
LONG
SCREWS (2)
FIGURE 60
8. Feed wire rope from pull station location through conduit
and each pulley elbow to the cable lever located in the regu-
lated release assembly.
NOTICE
Make certain the wire rope rides on top and
in the center of each pulley sheave. If the wire
rope has been spliced, do not allow the spliced
ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley
elbow or conduit adaptor.
9. Slide oval crimp sleeve, Part No. 4596, over end of wire rope
and then loop end of wire rope in groove around pull ring.
Insert end of rope through sleeve, snug tightly around pull
ring and crimp sleeve. See Figure 61. (Use the National Tel-
ephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No.
51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.)
PULL RING
1
STOP SLEEVE
PART NO. 4596
FIGURE 61
10. At the release mechanism, slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire
rope. Loop wire rope through cable lever guide holes and
back through the oval sleeve. Pull all but 1 to 2 in. (2.5 to
5.1 cm) of slack out of wire rope and crimp sleeve. See
Figure 59. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company
Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to
properly crimp stop sleeve.) Cut off excess wire rope.
11. At the pull station, position pull ring vertically in pull station
cover, insert break -away seal, Part No. 79029, through holes
in cover and snap in place. See Figure 62.
SNAP IN PLACE
ICE
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
FIGURE 62
To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the fol-
lowing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made
in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.)
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the
regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position.
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 63.
CARTRIDGE RECEIVER
Q ® PLUG
FIGURE 63
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-21
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
4. Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32
in. (.6 cm) holes,on right side of the enclosure. Assemble
with screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See
Figure 64. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted
position, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s) in the
bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 65.
FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING
AND FITTINGS
TOP KNOCKOL
BOTTOM KNOCKOUTS
SLEEVE
MOUNTING BRACKET
FIGURE 64
DP SLEEVES
AIR CYLINDER RODS
MOUNTING
BRACKETS
R TUBING
5
FIGURE 66
6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for
each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on
the regulated release mechanism. See Figures 64 and 66.
NOTICE
Do not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form a
bend too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting
IANICAL without over tightening. Over tightening could
VALVE result in pressure leakage or line separationYLINDER
at actuation.
7.
To reduce th7risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make
certain that as line is turned off before connectingthegasvalv
Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas
line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined
appliances being protected upon actuation of the system.
kTED RELEASE Mechanical gas valves may be mounted in any convenient
horizontal or vertical position. See Figure 67.
FIGURE 65
If two mechanical gas valves are being attached, complete Step
5. If not, go to Step 6.
5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system,
locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent
to first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in.(.6 cm)
holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble
second cylinder with screws, lockwashers, and nuts as
required. Wrench tighten. See Figure 66.
a. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal
chips.
b. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow
shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve
casting, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe
tape, paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra
care should be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply
lubricant to male threads only.
c. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS
VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE
DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 67.
d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance
with the authority having jurisdiction.
f. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve
must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m).
g. The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for
each gas valve is 20.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-22
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED.
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY.
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY.
ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED.
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY.
WRONG WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS
POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY.
r
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY.
WRONG WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS
POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY.
8. Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechan-
ical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as
necessary.
9. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end
of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod.
See Figure 64.
10. Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley
elbow.
Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of
pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced
to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends
to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit
adaptor.
11. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope
through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No.
26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National Tele-
phone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No.
51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make cer-
tain crimp is on top of cocking lever, with wire rope curled
under lever. See Figure 68.
E
COCKING
LEVER
FIGURE 68
12. With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole
in air cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto
wire rope and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this
time. See Figure 64.
FIGURE 67
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
13. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 69
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
FIGURE 69
14. Raise air cylinder rod "UP" to its maximum extended posi-
tion. See Figure 64.
15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack.
NOTICE
DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS
VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System
must have gas valve cocked and air cylinderIf
rod extended "UP" to its maximum extension
before completing next step.
16. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all
slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See
Figure 64.
17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm)
from end of stop sleeve.
18. NOTE: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate a single mechan-
ical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN
releases, see Figure 69a for installation instructions.
Maximum length of wire rope to each ANSUL
AUTOMAN release must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m)
and maximum number of elbows must not exceed
18.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 5-23
REV. 1
TO "ANSUL AUTOMAN"
RELEASE NUMBER 1
12 IN. (31 cm) 1FROMSLEEVE
PART NO. 24918 TO
PULLEY TEE
PART NO. 15342
2 IN. (5 cm) FROM
SLEEVE TO
COMPRESSION
FrrrING
TO "ANSUL AUTOMAN"
RELEASE NUMBER 2
NO PULLEY
ELBOWS
BETWEEN
TEE AND
VALVE
FIGURE 69a
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of
procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves.
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within
the regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position.
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
3.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make
certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting
the gas valve.
Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas
line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined
appliances being protected upon actuation of the system.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure
70.
a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal
chips.
b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal
pipe line with no more than a five degree (50) lean either
way.
c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow
shown on gas valve.
d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance
with authority having jurisdiction.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-24
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES (Continued)
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED.
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY.
CORRECT WAY: WRONG WAY:
WRENCH
PIPE BEO
PREVENT
ON VALVI
T THIS
VE BODY
FIGURE 70
4. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas
valve to manual reset relay enclosure.
5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve.
Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape
or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance
with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in
Design" section for typical wiring diagrams.
6.
Q •
Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain
main power has been disconnected. Failure to discon-
nect main power could cause personal injury or death
if contact is made with energized wires.
Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with
any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer
to manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for
assistance.
7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accord-
ance with authority having jurisdiction.
8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release
assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure.
If snap -action switches have not been attached, go to "Elec-
tric Switch" section on Page 5 — 24 and install them at this
time by completing Steps 3 through 8.
9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap -
action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual
reset relay.
10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap -action) switch to
manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's
instructions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance.
11. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accord-
ance with authority having jurisdiction.
12. Properly return electrical power to the system.
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The procedure for field installing an electric (snap -action) switch
is as follows:
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the
regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism
does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer
to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8 —1, in "Main-
tenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and
3 before completing the following installation steps.
If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole-
noid, it will also have a factory installed switch.
3. Press each 3-wire plug assembly into the 3-terminals located
on the switch. Be sure that the plug is pressed tight against
the switch. See Figure 71.
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
RED
L_
BLACK
O
BROWN
tPRESS PLUG
WIRE PLUG
ACTUATING ARM
TIGHTLY AGAINST
SWITCH TERMINALS
FIGURE 71
4. Insert fastening screws into switch. If switch (Part No. 32220,
Four -Pole, Double -Throw or Part No. 415868, 3 pole,
Double -Throw) is being used, skip Step 4 and proceed to
Step 5. See Figure 72.
Switches, Part No. 15549 and 32222, are provided with two
No.4-40 self -tapping screws.
Switch, Part No. 415868, is provided with two No. 4-40 x
1 1/2 in. long machine screws and two No. 4-40 Hex Nuts.
Switch, Part No. 32220, is provided with two No. 4-40 x 2
in. long machine screws and two No. 4-40 hex nuts.
5. To install the three -pole, double -throw switch, Part No.
415868, or the four -pole, double -throw switch, Part No.
32220, it will be necessary to enlarge the bracket mounting
holes on the regulated release mechanism. The mounting
holes are intended for self -tapping screws. Either drill the
holes using No. 33 (1/8 in.) drill bit or tap out holes with a
No. 4-40 tap. See Figure 72.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-23
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
13. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 69.
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
COCKING
LEVER
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
KII
R
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
FIGURE 69
14. Raise air cylinder rod "UP" to its maximum extended posi-
tion. See Figure 64.
15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack.
NOTICE
DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS
VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System
must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder
rod extended "UP" to its maximum extension
before completing next step.
16. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all
slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See
Figure 64.
17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm)
from end of stop sleeve.
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of
procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves.
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within
the regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verity that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position.
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
3.
Lt, •
rgas e risk of explosion du7tolea7king gas, makehegaslineisturnedconnecting
e.
Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas
line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined
appliances being protected upon actuation of the system.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure
70.
a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal
chips.
b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal
pipe line with no more than a five degree (50) lean either
way.
c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow
shown on gas valve.
d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance
with authority having jurisdiction.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-24
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES (Continued)
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO
PIPE BEING INSERTED.
PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN
ON VALVE BODY. \
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH
PIPE BEU
PREVENT
ON VALVI
WRONG WAY:
T THIS
VE BODY
FIGURE 70
4. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas
valve to manual reset relay enclosure.
5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve.
Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape
or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance
with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in
Design" section for typical wiring diagrams.
6.
Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain
main power has been disconnected. Failure to discon-
nect main power could cause personal injury or death
if contact is made with energized wires.
Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with
any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer
to manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for
assistance.
7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accord-
ance with authority having jurisdiction.
8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release
assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure.
If snap -action switches have not been attached, go to "Elec-
tric Switch" section on Page 5 — 24 and install them at this
time by completing Steps 3 through 8.
9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap -
action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual
reset relay.
10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap -action) switch to
manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's
instructions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance.
11. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accord-
ance with authority having jurisdiction.
12. Properly return electrical power to the system.
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The procedure for field installing an electric (snap -action) switch
is as follows:
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the
regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
Verity that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism
does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer
to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Main-
tenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and
3 before completing the following installation steps.
If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole-
noid, it will also have a factory installed switch.
3. Press each 3-wire plug assembly into the 3-terminals located
on the switch. Be sure that the plug is pressed tight against
the switch. See Figure 71.
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
RED
BLACK
O '- -
BROWN
PRESS PLUG
WIRE PLUG
ACTUATING ARM
TIGHTLY AGAINST
SWITCH TERMINALS
FIGURE 71
4. Insert fastening screws into switch. If switch (Part No. 32220,
Four -Pole, Double -Throw or Part No. 415868, 3 pole,
Double -Throw) is being used, skip Step 4 and proceed to
Step 5. See Figure 72.
Switches, Part No. 15549 and 32222, are provided with two
No.4-40 self -tapping screws.
Switch, Part No. 415868, is provided with two No. 4-40 x
1 1/2 in. long machine screws and two No. 4-40 Hex Nuts.
Switch, Part No. 32220, is provided with two No. 4-40 x 2
in. long machine screws and two No. 4-40 hex nuts.
5. To install the three -pole, double -throw switch, Part No.
415868, or the four -pole, double -throw switch, Part No.
32220, it will be necessary to enlarge the bracket mounting
holes on the regulated release mechanism. The mounting
holes are intended for self -tapping screws. Either drill the
holes using No. 33 (1/8 in.) drill bit or tap out holes with a
No. 4-40 tap. See Figure 72.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-25
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES (Continued)
FOR SNAP -ACTION SWITCH, PART NO. 15549 OR 32222
FOR SNAP -ACTION SWITCH, PART NO. 32220
TRIP LEVER --4J
EXTENSION STUD
1NTING
CKET
SNAP -ACTION
SWITCH
LOCKWASHER
10 MOUNTING
BRACKET
SNAP -ACTION
SWITCHES
FIGURE 72
6. Install switch to the mounting bracket and tighten securely.
7. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface
of the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actu-
ated, to force the actuating arm "UP", thus reversing the
normal condition of the switch. See Figure 73.
For switch, Part No. 15549, use screw, Part No. 415870,
and nut, Part No. 21918, on trip lever.
For switch, Part No. 32222, 415868, and 32220, use the
trip lever cam extension stud that is provided.
Before proceeding with Step 8, test electric (snap -action)
switches:
a. Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the
cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch
up. If the switch is working properly there should be
an audible click.
b . With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press
the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible
click.
c . If an audible click is heard in the fired position several
adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin
can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is
pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that
position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the
screws holding the switches, apply a small counter-
clockwise torque on the switches and retighten the
screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made
by removing the snap action switch and bending the
lever slightly.
d. After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock
ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar.
ACTUATING ARM
TRIP LEVER CAM
O p
O
DUAL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
PART NO. 32222
SNAP -ACTION SWITCH
PART NO. 15549
m m O
O
TRIP LEVER
EXTENSION STUD
TWO DUAL SNAP -ACTION SWITCHES
PART NO. 32M
FIGURE 73
8. The switch may now be connected to compatible compo-
nents that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer
to manufacturer's instructions (if provided) for proper wiring
connections to compatible components.
9. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accord-
ance with authority having jurisdiction.
NOTICE
Do not connect power source to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices until
all other electrical connections are made.
Refer to proper section or manufacturer sup-
plied instructions for recommended installa-
tion procedures for these devices.
10. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used.
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 5-26
INSTALLING PRESSURE SWITCH
The procedure for field installing a pressure switch is as follows:
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the
release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that regulated release mechanism
is in the cocked position.
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
3. Assemble pressure switch through knockout holes provided
on right side of regulated release assembly enclosure and
secure with a 1/2 in. nut, which is provided. See Figure 53.
If two pressure switches are required, preassemble the
switch enclosures using a 1/2 x 1 1/2 in. pipe nipple, 3/4
in. long spacer, and conduit nuts. The pipe nipple can be
used as a wiring chaseway. See Figure 74.
FOR MOUNTING ONE PRESSURE SWITCH
114 IN. TEE WITH
114 IN. x 118 IN.REDUCER
C
PIE
4I IN.
NIP 4
N. LONG 118
IN. ELBOW PRESSURE
SWITCH 1/
8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND
FITTINGS IN.
NUT FOR
MOUNTING TWO PRESSURE SWITCHES PRESSURE
SWITCH HOUSING
114
IN. NIPPLE 4
IN. LONG 1/
8 IN. ELBOW 112
1N. x 112 IN. NIPPLE,
314
IN. SPACER. 2
112 IN. NUTS 4.
For single -tank systems, install a 1/8 in. reducing fitting in the
top outlet of the regulator; double -tank systems require an
additional 1/4 in. nipple (4 in. long) and a 1/4 in. tee for installation
to the expellant gas piping. Attach remaining 1/8 in.
fittings as required to facilitate piping requirements for each
pressure switch that will be used. See Figure 74. NOTICE
Do
not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form a bend
too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting without
over tightening. Over tightening could result
in pressure leakage or line separation at
actuation. 5.
Wire each pressure switch to other compatible components in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions (if provided). A
QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN should connect all electrical components
in accordance with authority having jurisdic- tion.
See Figure 75. SINGLE -
POLE PRESSURE SWITCH COMMON-
0
RESET
SWITCH
NORMALL' CLOSED
DOUBLE -
POLE PRESSURE SWITCH ONORMALLY
OPEN6
O
0
COMMON
RESET
NORMALLY SWITCH
CLOSED FEMALE
CONNECTORS WIRE
NOT
SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) FEMALE
CONNECTORS WIRE
NOT
SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) I
FIGURE
75 N
118 IN. TEE AND FITTINGS 1/
4 IN. TEE WITH 114
IN. x 1/8 IN.REDUCER FIGURE 74
SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 6-1
a
After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE
INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at
the regulated release assembly.
TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION
To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following
steps:
1. With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar
from regulated release assembly cable lever.
2. On metal stamped pull station, remove glass break rod from
pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide
glass break rod out. On molded plastic pull station, seal will
be broken during test and must be replaced.
3. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release
assembly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station
is properly installed.
If the regulated release assembly does not trip, remove
pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make
certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does
not correct the problem, there is too much slack in the line
and it must be retightened.
4. Cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above oval sleeve.
5. Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever
Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985)
6. On metal stamped pull station, slide glass break rod through
stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. On
molded plastic pull station, replace seal.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, pro-
ceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the
detection system.
TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the fol-
lowing steps:
1.
A
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any
open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical
or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Turn gas line on.
2. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full "DOWN" posi-
tion. The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve
does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make cer-
tain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this
does not correct the problem there may be too much slack
in the line and it should be retightened.
3. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu-
tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections
where leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain
no other gas leaks exist.
4. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP"
position.
5. Recock mechanical gas valve.
6. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO
THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will
cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
7. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
time.
8. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain
roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing
slot. Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on Ansul
type valves. See Figure 1.
SPECTION
IT NO. 197)
I;ILeITI7:1
9. Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked
with lock bar in place.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, pro-
ceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the
detection system.
SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 6-2
TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH
To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap -Action)
steps: Switch is as follows:
1.
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any
open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical
or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Turn gas line on.
2. Make certain electric (snap -action) switch is properly wired.
3. Make certain all other devices connected to the manual
reset relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring dia-
grams in Figures 80, 81, and 82 in "Design" section.
4. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu-
tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections
where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no
other gas leaks exist.
5. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress
the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON)
to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve.
6. Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached
to system, perform proper test procedure for
the gas valve first, before completing the fol-
lowing steps.
1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button
on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical
devices should be operating at this time.
2. Remove lock bar.
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated.
3.
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 4
7. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull
station. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod
prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED
LIGHT OUT) will de -energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve,
thus shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn
power source off. Then re-examine all wiring connections
for proper hookup. Refer to Figures 80, 81, and 82 in
Design" section for typical wiring diagram.
8. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism
using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar
Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual reset
relay (RED LIGHT ON).
9. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY.
This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
10. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
time.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, pro-
ceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the
detection system.
Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull
station. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod
prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset
relay will de -energize the electric gas valve, thus shutting
off the gas line.) All electrically -operated devices predeter-
mined to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does not
occur, turn power source off and make sure all wiring is
properly connected and retest. Refer to Figures 84, 85, and
86 in "Design" section for typical wiring diagram.
If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism
using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar
Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay is installed, depress
the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be necessary
to re -light any pilot lights on the cooking appliances.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, pro-
ceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the
detection system.
SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 6-3
C
C
TESTING PRESSURE SWITCH
The procedures for testing a field installed pressure switch is
as follows:
NOTICE
This test should only be performed by a
OUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN.
If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached
to system, perform proper test procedure for
the gas valve first, before completing the fol-
lowing steps.
1. Make certain power source is turned off.
2. Push each pressure switch reset button on front of switch
housing assembly. An audible click may be heard at this
time depending' on which condition the switch is in. See
Figure 2.
0
10
RESET
BUTTON
FIGURE 2
3. Detach each pressure switch cover from housing assembly.
4. By use of an ohmmeter, verity that contacts are in their
normal (READY) condition. Contact conditions are marked
on switch. See Figure 3.
NORMALLY
OPEN CONTACT
COMM(
NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACT
RESET SWITCH
FIGURE 3
5. Manually lift up on each pressure plate or pressure nut. An
audible click should be heard at this time. The sound veri-
fies that the switch has transferred to an actuated condi-
tion. See Figure 4.
RESET
RE PLATE
FIGURE 4
6. By use of an ohmmeter, verity that contacts are in their actu-
ated condition. (Normally open is now closed and normally
closed is now open.)
7. Reattach pressure switch cover to housing assembly.
8. Push each reset button to resume normal (READY) condi-
tion. An audible click should be heard at this time.
9. Turn power source on.
10. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked with
lock bar in place.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, pro-
ceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the
detection system.
SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 6-4
TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM
1. Test detection system by completing the following steps:
a. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever
to the "UP" position.
b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and
install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 5.
O
TEST LINK
FIGURE 5
c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket.
For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket
slightly toward termination end of detection run.
For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket
all the way toward termination end of detection run.
d. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to
DOWN" position and remove lock bar.
e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal
detector to simulate automatic actuation.
I. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4.
2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check
the following components and remedy any disorder as
follows:
a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning.
b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming.
c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and
centered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley
elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow.
d. Make certain that lock bar is removed.
e. Make certain that regulated release mechanism is
cocked.
I. Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN" position.
3. Re -test the system by completing the following steps:
a. Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar
is inserted.
b. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever
to the "UP" position.
c: Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on the terminal
detector.
d. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever
to the "DOWN" position.
e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum clearance between
the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever
assembly.
I. Remove the lock bar.
g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal
detector to simulate automatic actuation.
4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the fol-
lowing steps:
a. Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a
properly -rated fusible link in the terminal detector.
b. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985).
c. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
d. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket.
For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket
slightly toward termination end of detection run.
For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket
all the way toward termination end of detection run.
e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum clearance
was maintained between the base of the trip hammer
assembly and the cable lever assembly.
NOTICE
Reset any electrical equipment that may have
been affected by the system actuation.
I. Install appropriate cartridge into the regulated release
mechanism receiver and each regulated actuator
receiver. Hand tighten firmly.
g. Remove the lock bar.
h. Snap cover on regulated release assembly and each
regulated actuator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No.
197) in each upper and lower cover hole and secure.
i. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or
in a permanent file.
B
SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 7-1
CFor continued fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire sup- c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten.
pression system must be recharged immediately after use. d. At expellant gas line inlet to adaptor/tube assembly,
Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple -tank install a 1/4 in. male quick connect adaptor.
systems are as follows.
e. Connect nitrogen cylinder outlet hose to the male quick
RECHARGE connect adaptor using the female portion of the adaptor
assembly.
NOTICE 7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty
Determine the cause of system discharge and plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each
correct immediately before performing system nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure
recharge.
3..
If using plactic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9.
1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8.
assembly.
HIGH
PRESSURE VENT HOLES
2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the GAUGE SUPPLY /
expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. NITROGEN REGULATOR
LINE
From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure: Dis- VALVE ER
LOW ~
connect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor /
PRESSURJD
GAUGENOZZLE
inlet line(s). fFITTING
3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor ® i BALL VAL
outlet line(s). '
K
4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. ONNECT
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank.
HEAVY GAUGE
5. Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly. Remove O-ring NITROG N PLASTIC BAG
C
and inspect for damage. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good CYLINDER
P 9 9 9 OUTLET HOSE
grade of extreme temperature grease and reinstall into 285 PSI (1827 kPa)
adaptor groove. See Figure 1. SAFETY VENT
RELIEF VALVE
FLUSHING TANK
NITROGEN
CYLINDER
O-RING
FIGURE 2
FIGURE 1 NOZZLE TIP
NITROGEN AND RETAINER
CYLINDER
VALVE SUPPLY \\`\ NOZZLE BODY
6 -/
HIGH
LINE \
PRESSURE REGULATOR Tf
Do not flush pipe with only water or other non -approved GAUGE _ Fk'7
HIGH PRESSURE
p p y PP Low PLASTIC TUBING
material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading PRESSURE
to possible improper discharge. f GAUGE .
TANK OUTLET
BALL VALVE HOSE
Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet Chem- /// OUICK
ical residue. To prepare the system for flushing: DISCONNECT
112 IN. NPT COMPRESSION
a. Pour the complete contents of one 4 oz. bottle of Ansul FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR
Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty NITROGEN
R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either CYLINDER
size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon. HOSE
b. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean 265 PSI (1827 kPa)
C
water. Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add SAFETY VENT
g RELIEF VALVE
more warm water to bring the fill level to within approx
imately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill opening.
NITROGEN
CYLINDER
t
FLUSHING TANK
FIGURE 3
SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 7-2
REV. 1
RECHARGE (Continued)
8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) O.D.
plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed .062 in. (1.6
mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of
at least 90 PSI (620.6 kPa) expelled during the flushing and
blowdown procedures.
Also required is a container with some means of securing
tubing to it such as a five -gallon plastic pail and cover that
snaps onto the pail.
To prepare the plastic tubing:
a. Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them
long enough to reach the container from each nozzle
outlet.
b. Using a 1 N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930),
slide a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the
rib on the nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm)
adjustable hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip
will be connected to the nozzle body left installed in
the distribution piping.
c. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required,
large enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one addi-
tional hole that can be used for venting.
d. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors
to the pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure
4.
1N NOZZLE TIP
AND RETAINER
RIB ON NOZZLE (PART NO. 56930)
1/2 IN. TUBING-+
muff
1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE
HOSE CLAMP
TUBING 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION
INSERT - /FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR
1/2 IN.
f/
CONDUIT NUTS PAIL COVER
FIGURE 4
e. Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings.
Tubing inserts will be required. See Figure 4.
f. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge
piping.
g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the
pail cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail.
9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure:
a. Connect discharge hose, from the flushing tank, to the
distribution piping at the tank union.
L7
Before attempting any further procedures, the
nitrogen cylinder assembly and flushing agent tank
must be secured to an immovable object to prevent
an accident due to hazardous cylinder and/or tank
movement.
Secure both the nitrogen cylinder and discharge tank.
c. Make certain that the nitrogen cylinder valve and the
ball valve is CLOSED.
d. Verify that all hose and/or tubing is securely fastened.
e. With the regulator set at 100 PSI (690 kPa), open the
nitrogen cylinder valve.
f. Open ball valve to pressurize and discharge the solu-
tion in the tank.
g. After all nozzles have stopped discharging liquid, allow
nitrogen gas to flow for a minimum of 15 seconds, then
close ball valve.
h. Close nitrogen cylinder valve.
i. Relieve pressure between ball valve and cylinder valve
by opening ball valve.
j. After all pressure has been relieved from piping, dis-
connect all hoses and tubing/plastic bags.
k. Follow the same procedures for each additional tank
piping to be flushed.
I. Wash out all system nozzle tips and strainers in warm
soapy water, rinse and return all tips and strainers to
their appropriate locations in the discharge piping.
m. Wash out nozzle tips used for blowdown and rinse out
tubing and hose.
10. Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 gallons (11.6 L) of only
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant.
Make certain tank is filled to 1 in. t 1/8 in. (2.54 cm t
3 cm). DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing
system malfunction.
11. Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, in adaptor
assembly. Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank.
12. Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place.
Return and secure each tank in regulated release assembly
and mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas
and distribution piping as required.
13. Raise tension lever to "UP" position.
14. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
Part No. 14995) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985).
SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 7-3
1 RECHARGE (Continued)
15. Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly
and each regulated actuator assembly -as required.
CAUTION
Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system
may be actuated.
16. Install properly -rated fusible links in all detectors except the
terminal detector.
NOTICE
If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all
fusible links must be replaced.
17. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector.
18. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
19. Remove the lock bar.
20. Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector
to simulate automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the "Testing
Detection System" portion of the "Testing and
Placing In Service" section, Page 6-4, of this
manual.
21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
22. Install properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link in terminal
detector.
23. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar
Part No. 14985).
24. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each
bracket.
25. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance
between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the
cable lever assembly.
NOTICE
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum,
raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip
hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set
screws, and repeat Steps 25 and 26.
27. Remove lock bar.
28. Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operating
the remote manual pull station.
29. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock
bar.
30. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actu-
ation. Refer to "Resetting" section, Page 7-3 and 7-4.
RESETTING
Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station
Metal Stamped Style
Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the fol-
lowing steps:
1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break
glass rod.
2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass
from station.
3. Press and position ring handle in proper location against
cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No.
4834) through stud and handle.
4. Tighten set screw into stud.
5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5.
Molded Plastic Style
1. Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover.
2. Insert break -away seal, Part No. 79029, through holes in
cover and snap in place.
Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut -Off Valve
Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the fol-
lowing steps:
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open
flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechan-
ical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
1. Remove side cover from gas valve housing.
2. Extend air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Air cylinder
is located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure.
3. Recock gas valve by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem
engages in cocking lever.
4. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO
THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will
cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
5. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
time.
6. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On Ansul type
valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides
of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal
Part No. 197).
7. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5.
SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 7-4
REV. 1
RESETTING (Continued)
Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap -Action)
Reset the electric (snap -action) switch by completing the fol
lowing steps:
1. Make certain the power source is on.
Electric (snap -action) switch is reset automatically when the
regulated release mechanism is recocked.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5.
Resetting Electrical Gas Shut -Off Valve
Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the following
steps:
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open
flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechan-
ical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
1. Make certain the power source is on.
2. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on).
Gas valve will resume its normal operating (open) position.
3. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY.
This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
4. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
time.
5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5.
Resetting Pressure Switch
Reset the pressure switch by completing the following:
1. Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover.
The pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right
side of the regulated release enclosure. An audible click
will be heard to verify the pressure switch has resumed its
normal (non -actuated) condition.
2. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5.
REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE
To complete the recharge and resetting procedures:
1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartrdige.
Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below
weight stamped on cartridge.
2. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and
lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into
the regulated release assembly and each regulated actu-
ator receiver and hand tighten.
3. Remove lock bar.
4. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actu-
ator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and
lower cover hole and secure.
5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a
permanent file.
SECTION Vill — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 8-1
REV. 1
C
C
Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval,
along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be
hydro -tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested.
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and
multiple -tank systems are as follows.
NOTICE
Under certain circumstances hood and duct
cleaning operations may render the fire sup-
pression system ineffective due to a coating
of cleaning chemical left on the detection
equipment or mishandling of the system by
cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is
strongly recommended that the R-102
system be completely inspected and serv-
iced by an authorized Ansul distributor
immediately following any such cleaning
operations.
Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
assembly.
Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated
release mechanism. See Figure 1.
7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright posi-
tion to avoid spilling the agent.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
8. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See
Figure 2.
FIGURE 2
9. Make certain that each tank is filled to a level of 1 in. t
1/8 (2.54 cm t .3) from the bottom of the fill opening. See
Figure 3.
D.
CAUTION
CK BAR
OPERLY Make certain tank is filled to 1 in. f 1/8 in. (2.54 cm f
TnLLEo 3 cm). DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing
system malfunction.
FIGURE 1
3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and
each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping
cap, and set aside in a safe location.
4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat
gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature
grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s).
5. From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the
expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the
expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
outlet line.
1 IN. * 1/8
2.54 cm + .3 cm)
FIGURE 3
SECTION Vill — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 8-2
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
10. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for
nicks, burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with
a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Make cer-
tain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from
tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube
assembly to each tank. Tighten securely. See Figure 4.
FIGURE 4
11. Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and
secure.
12. Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and
agent distribution piping.
13. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off
cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps,
make certain spring clip rotates freely on cap.
NOTICE
Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed
in the system for one year or more must be
replaced.
14. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking
grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease
on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps.
15. Remove the lock bar and manually test the regulated
release assembly by operating the remote manual pull sta-
tion. Check pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace
cover if cable has worn a groove in the cover as deep as
the diameter of the cable.
16. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
Part No. 14995). See Figure 5.
Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap -action)
switches:
a. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready
position, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch
is working properly, there should be an audible click.
b . With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press
the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible
click.
c . If an audible click is heard in the fired position several
adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin
can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is
pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that
position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the
screws holding the switches, apply a small counter-
clockwise torque on the switches and retighten the
screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made
by removing the snap action switch and bending the
lever slightly.
d . After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock
ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar.
FIGURE 5
17. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 6.
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
FIGURE 6
SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 8-3
C SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
18. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector.
19. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 7.
TENSION LEVER
IN "DOWN" POSITION
I
GL
00 I If
I If
I ,
FIGURE 7
20. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simu-
late automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing
Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in
Service," Section 6, Page 6-3.
21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
22. Clean and return properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link
to terminal detector.
NOTICE
Fusible links installed in system for one year
or more must be replaced. Ansul recommends
replacement of links every six months.
23. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series
detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and
other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in
actuation.)
24. Lower the tension lever to "DOWN" position.
25. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock
bar.
26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clear-
ance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and
the cable lever assembly. See Figure 8.
4 IN. (6.4 MM)
AINIMUM
TRIP
HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 8
NOTICE
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum,
raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip
hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set
screws, and repeat Steps 24 and 26.
27. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each
bracket.
For 'blip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly
toward termination end of detection run.
For "scissor' style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the
way toward termination end of detection run.
28. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment
by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Reset-
ting Procedures," Section 7.
29. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace
if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight
stamped on cartridge.
30. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and
lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into
regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator
receiver(s) and hand tighten.
31. Remove lock bar.
32. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actu-
ator, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover
and box, and secure.
33. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to
unit and/or in a permanent file.
SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 8-4
REV. 1
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
Twelve-year maintenance procedures for single, double, and
multiple -tank systems are as follows.
NOTICE
Under certain circumstances hood and duct
cleaning operations may render your fire sup-
pression system ineffective due to a coating
of cleaning chemical left on the detection
equipment or mishandling of the system by
cleaning service personnel.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that
the R-102 system be completely inspected
and serviced by an authorized Ansul dis-
tributor immediately following any such
cleaning operations.
At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent
tank(s) must be hydrostatically tested and
refilled with a fresh charge of ANSULEX Low
pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of
manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the
agent tank.
1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
assembly.
2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated
release mechanism. See Figure 9.
llift.
BAR
ERLY INSTALLED
FIGURE 9
3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and
each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping
cap, and set aside in a safe location.
CAUTION
Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be
actuated.
4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat
gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature
grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s).
5. From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose
from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas
piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
outlet line.
7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
8. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove.
9.
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations
of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid
contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush
immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation per-.
sists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken
internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or
milk and contact a physician.
Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic con-
tainer, and flush tank with clear water.
10. At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in.
gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED
to 300 psi (2069 kPa). Verify date stamped on cartridge. The
cartridge must be hydrotested at intervals not greater than
12 years. If cartridge date indicates the need for
hydrotesting, the cartridge must be bled down through
normal ANSUL AUTOMAN release operation, returned to
Ansul for credit, and replaced with a charged, replacement
cartridge. J
NOTICE
Cartridge bleed down can be used to verify
pneumatic accessories operation.
11. The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check
the date code stamped on the regulator body to determine
if the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code
table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step
12. Flow test the regulator(s) per the following:
Date Code Table
Month — Code Year — Code
January A 1986 R
February B 1987 S
March C 1988 T
April D 1989 U
May E 1990 V
June F 1991 W
July G 1992 Y
August H 1993 Z
September J 1994 A
October K 1995 B
November L 1996 C
December M 1997 D
1998 E
1999 F
2000 G
Ql
SECTION Vill — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 8-5
C
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
11. (Continued)
a. Regulated Release Mechanism
For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from
tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to
hose. See Figure 10.
FIGURE 10
For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at
union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and
install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from
escaping during test. See Figure 11.
E
FIGURE 11
Pressure Switch: If pressure switch is provided, it
should remain connected as part of system mainte-
nance test.
NOTICE
For multiple -tank systems, one test kit (Part
No. 56972) is required for each regulator in
the system.
b. Regulated Actuator
For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from
tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to
hose. See Figure 12.
FIGURE 12
For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at
union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and
install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from
escaping during test. See Figure 13.
FIGURE 13
NOTICE
Make certain valve is closed on regulator test
kit or pressure will escape before test can be
performed.
c. Install LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge(s) (Part No. 5373) into
release mechanism and each regulated actuator
provided with the system. (Cartridge should be condi-
tioned to approximately 70 OF (21 °C) before test.)
SECTION Vlll — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 8-6
REV. 1
i
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
d. Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull sta-
tion to actuate the regulated release and supply pres-
sure to each test kit.
e. Flow test each regulator by completing the following
steps:
Open test kit valve fully and check gauge while
pressure is bleeding off. Gauge reading should
stabilize between 95-125 psi (655-862 kPa) during
the first 10 seconds of flow. Pressure will fall off
as the cartridge is exhausted of nitrogen.
Allow cartridge pressure to completely bleed off.
If necessary, continue flow test at each additional
regulated actuator. Test each regulated actuator
by repeating step e.
f. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No.
14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985).
g. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mech-
anism and each regulated actuator.
h. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each
regulated actuator.
i. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator.
j. Reconnect all expellant gas lines.
k. Reset all additional equipment that was operated by
release mechanism.
12. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks,
burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with a good
grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting
disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See Figure
14.
FIGURE 14
13. Refill each tank with 1.5 gallons (5.8 L) or 3.0 gallons
11.6 L) of new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant.
When filled, level of liquid should be 1 in. t 1/8 (2.54 cm
t .3) from bottom of fill opening. See Figure 15.
Make certain tank is filled to 1 in. t 1/8 in. (2.54 cm t
3 cm). DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing
system malfunction.
1 IN. * 1/8
2.54 cm * .3 cm)
FIGURE 15
14. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube
assembly to tank. Firmly tighten.
NOTICE
Do not reinstall any tank at this time.
15. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off
cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps,
make certain spring clip rotates freely on cap.
NOTICE
Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed
in the system for one year or more must be
replaced.
16. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking
grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease
on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps.
17. Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release
assembly by operating the remote manual pull station.
18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
Part No. 14995). See Figure 16.
FIGURE 16
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 8-7
C
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
19. Raise the tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 17
C
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
FIGURE 17
20. Install test link (Part No.15751) in terminal detector.
21. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 18.
11
TENSION LEVER
IN "DOWN" POSITION
FIGURE 18
22. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simu-
late automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing
Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in
Service," Section 6.
23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
24. Clean and return properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link
to terminal detector.
NOTICE
Fusible links installed in system for one year
or more must be replaced.
25. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series
detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and
other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in
actuation.)
26. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
27. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock
bar.
28. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clear-
ance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and
the cable lever assembly. See Figure 19.
114 IN. (6.4 MM)
MINIMUM
TRIP
HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 19
NOTICE
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum,
raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip
hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set
screws, and repeat Steps 26 and 28.
29. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each
bracket.
30. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended.
31. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment
by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Reset-
ting Procedures," Section 7.
32. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket
and secure.
33. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping
unions as required. Wrench tighten.
34. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and
weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g),
or more, below weight stamped on cartridge.
35. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and
lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into
regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator
receiver(s) and hand tighten.
36. Remove lock bar.
37. Place regulated release assembly and each regulated actu-
ator assembly enclosure cover in -place.
38. Insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in holes in cover and box
and secure.
39. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag
attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file.
K1
ro
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-1
REV. 1
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE
Total Tank Type of Nitrogen
Flow No.' Ouantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required
1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release LT-20-R (7032)
6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release LT-30-R (5373)
12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release LT-20-R (7032)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
28-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release LT-30-R (5373)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator ' LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release LT-20-R (7032)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release LT-30-R (5373)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
56-60 6 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
61-66 6 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release Double (73022)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
67-71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
1.5 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101.30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-30-R (5373)
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. See pages 4.30 and 4.33 for exceptions.
II tanks are manifolded. only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Pan No. 73022) can be used.
II tanks are manifolded. only an LT-A-101.30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 29187) can be used.
Carbon Dioxide
Cartridge Required
101-10 (15850)
101-20 (17492)
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-20 (17492)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)-
101-30 (15851).
101-10(15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-20 (17492)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)-
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-20 (17492)"'
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-2
REV. 1
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)
Total Tank Type of Nitrogen
Flow No.' Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required
72-77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-30-R (5373)
78-82 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
1.5 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
83-88 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (28187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
89-93 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
1.5 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-20-R (7032)
01
94-99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-30-R (5373)
100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850)
1.5 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. See pages 4.30 and 4.33 for exceptions.
If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 73022) can be used.
If tanks are manifolded, only an LT-A-101.30 nitrogen cartridge Part No. 29187) can be used.
Carbon Dioxide
Cartridge Required
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-20 (17492)
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851) "
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-20 (17492)
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101 -20(17492)
101-10 (15850)
101-30 (15851)
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
101-30 (15851)"'
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-3
REV. 1
C SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)
Total Tank Type of Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide
Flow No. Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required
105-110 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (15850) 101-10 (15850)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187) 101-30 (15851)"'
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187) 101-30 (15851)"'
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (28187) 101-30 (15851)"'
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (28187) 101-30 (15851)"'
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator LT-A-101-30 (29187) 101-30 (15851)"'
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gat. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. See pages 4.30 and 4-33 for exceptions.
It tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Pan No. 73022) can be used.
If tanks are manifolded, only an LT-A-101.30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 29187) can be used.
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-4
REV. 1
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX
Part No. Description
78937 3.0 Gallon Red Painted Tank -Bracket Shipping
Assembly
Includes: Red Painted Tank
Red Painted Bracket
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
79290 3.0 Gallon Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure
Red Painted Tank
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
79292 3.0 Gallon Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with
Solenoid and Switch in
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure
Red Painted Tank
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
79327 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
Includes: Actuator and Regulator in
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure
Red Painted Tank
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
78929 3.0 Gallon Tank and Stainless Steel Mounting
Box Shipping Assembly
Includes: Red Painted Tank
Stainless Steel Mounting Box
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
78232 1.5 Gallon Tank -Bracket Shipping Assembly
Includes: Red Painted Tank
Red Painted Bracket
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
79291 1.5 Gallon Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure
Red Painted Tank
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
79137 1.5 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
Includes: Actuator and Regulator in
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure
Red Painted Tank
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
78921 1.5 Gallon Tank and Stainless Steel Mounting
Box Shipping Assembly
Includes: Red Painted Tank
Stainless Steel Mounting Box
Adaptor/Tube Assembly
56972 Regulator Test Kit
Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly
Part No. Description
79694 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH
Liquid Fire Suppressant
79372 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low
pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
7032 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R)
5373 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R)
73022 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double -Tank)
29187 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30)
15850 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10)
17492 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20)
15851 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30)
56932 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 W)
Includes: 25 1 W Nozzles (Part No. 56927)
25 Blow -Off Caps
56934 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1/2N)
Includes: 2 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 56929)
2 Blow -Off Caps
56935 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N) i
Includes: 25 IN Nozzles (Part No. 56930)
25 Blow -Off Caps
76781 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N)
Includes: 2 3N Nozzles (Part No. 76782)
2 Blow -Off Caps
73830 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2WH)
Includes: 25 2WH Nozzles (Part No. 78078)
25 Blow -Off Caps
415570 Swivel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (INS)
Includes: 9 INS Nozzle (Part No. 415566)
9 Blow -Off Caps
415571 Swivel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 WS)
Includes: 9 1 WS Nozzles (Part No. 415567)
9 Blow -Off Caps
56933 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W)
Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 56928)
25 Blow -Off Caps
418128 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230)
Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 418117)
25 Blow -Off Caps
418129 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245)
Includes: 25 245 Nozzles (Part No. 418118)
25 Blow -Off Caps I
c SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
418130 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260)
Includes: 25 260 Nozzles (Part No. 418119p
25 Blow -Off Caps
418131 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290)
Includes: 25 290 Nozzles (Part No. 418120
25 Blow -Off Caps
418132 Nozzle Shipping Assembly
Includes: 2 2120 Nozzles (Part No. 418121)
2 Blow -Off Caps
77695 Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare)
Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps
79745 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps For Standard
Non -Swivel Nozzles
415568 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps for
Swivel Nozzles
56837 Series Detector Package ("Clip -On")
56838 Terminal Detector Package ("Clip -On")
Includes: Test Link
15373 Series Detector Package ("Hinged")
15375 Terminal Detector Package ("Hinged")
Includes: Test Link
417369 Series Detector Package ("Scissor")
417368 Terminal Detector Package ("Scissor")
Includes: Test Link
415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly
Socket End) — to 700 OF (371 °C)
Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670)
73868 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly
Compression End) — to 700 IF (371 °C)
Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 45771)
15342 Pulley Tee
15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m))
79653 Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m))
24919 Stop Sleeve Package
Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317)
24918 Oval Sleeve Package
Includes: 10 Oval Sleeves (Part No. 4596)
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-5
REV. 1
Part No. Description
78196 1/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 78195)
77285 3/8 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77284)
77287 1/2 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77286)
77289 3/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77288)
79149 1/4 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No.
79148)
79151 3/8 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No.
79150)
79147 112 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No.
79146)
79153 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal" EMT Conduit Adaptor
Package
Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No.
79152)
79768 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 6 Hood Seals
13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve — 3/4 in.
13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 in.
13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 1/2 in.
13710 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 2 in.
17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 3 in.
14702 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC,
60 Hz)
Includes: Relay — Manual Reset
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-6
REV. 1
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
15549 Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Single -Pole,
Double Throw
Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT)
32222 Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Double -Pole,
Double Throw
Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT)
415868 Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Three -Pole,
Double Throw
Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT)
32220 Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Four -Pole, Double
Throw
Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT)
53133 Pressure Switch (SPDT)
24377 Pressure Switch (DPDT)
55598 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3/4 in.
55601 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 in.
55604 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/4 in.
55607 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/2 in.
55610 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 in.
25937 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 1/2 in.
25938 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3 in.
15733 Gas Shut-off Equipment
Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly
4835 Remote Manual Pull Station — Metal Stamped
Includes: Remote Manual Pull Station
Assembly
50 Ft. (15 m) of Wire Rope
415255 Remote Pull Station — Plastic Molded
415256 Trim Ring (12)
Includes: 25 Trim Rings, (Part No. 73859)
For Plastic Molded Pull Station)
415317 Break -away Seal Shipping Assembly
Includes: 25 Break -away seals, Part No. 79029
24915 Break Rod Package
Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834)
Replacement)
Part No. Description
7032 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-20-R Cartridge
5373 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-30-R Cartridge
73022 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Double System Cartridge
29187 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-A-101-30 Cartridge
15850 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-10 Cartridge
17492 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-20 Cartridge
15851 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-30 Cartridge
79372 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant
79674 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant
417911 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor
Bursting Discs
77695 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps
24916 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 15751)
415739 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Fusible Link 165 OF (74 °C)
415740 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Fusible Link 212 OF (100 °C)
415744 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 280 OF (138 °C)
Part No. 415741)
415745 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 of (182 °C)
Part No. 415742)
415746 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 OF (232 °C)
Part No. 415743)
73867 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 OF (260 °C)
Part No. 56816)
c SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
79651 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Bracket — "Clip -On"
53771 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Linkage — "Clip -On"
79651 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Bracket — "Scissor"
415817 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Linkage — "Scissor"
15344 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Bracket — "Hinged"
15343 Recharge1Equipment
Includes: Detector Bracket Linkage —
Hinged"
14985 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Lock Bar
14995 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Cocking Lever
15618 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar
Assembly
15240 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 500 OF (260 °C) Exhaust Duct
Thermometer
197 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Lead and Wire Seal
418087 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Installation Manual
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-6.1
REV. 1
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-6.2
NOTES:
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 9-7
ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
1e
Figure
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
Mounting Box
Basic Release w/Regulator
Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator
Self -Tapping Screw
Spacer
Tension Spring
Lever and Bracket Assembly
Machine Screw
Lockwasher
Hex Nut
Caution Label
Gasket
Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-20-R/101-10
LT-30-R/101-20
Double Tank/101-30
Safety Shipping Cap
Tank Assembly
Tank Adaptor Assembly
Bursting Disc (Not Shown)
O-Ring (Not Shown)
Shell
Nameplate
Hose Assembly
Enclosure Cover
Nameplate
Solenoid Assembly
Electric Snap -Action Switch
1.5 Gallon
Mechanical
Part No.
79291
79293
79140
71342
76555
79094
79300
14973
7310
14732
57652
181
7032/15850
5373/17492
73022/15851
77251
79098
79101
56909
79100
73760
79007
79325
79295
20
3.0 Gallon
Mechanical
Part No.
79290
79293
79140
71342
76555
79094
79300
14973
7310
14732
57652
181
5373/17492
73022/ 15851
77251
79015
79020
56909
79016
73761
79007
79325
79296
21
3.0 Gallon
Electrical
Part No.
79292
79293
79288
71342
76555
79094
79300
14973
7310
14732
57652
181
5373/17492
73022/ 15851
77251
79015
79020
56909
79016
73761
79007
79325
79296
14988
17781
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 9-8
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
14
Figure 1.5 Gallon 3.0 Gallon
No. Description Part No. Part No.
Regulated Actuator Assembly 79137 79327
1 Mounting Box 79293 79293
2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly 79340 79340
3 Hex Jam Nut 67990 67990
4 Flat Washer 67991 67991
5 Lockwasher 69521 69521
6 Gasket 181 181
7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-20-R/101-10 7032/15850
LT-30-R/101-20 5373/17492 5373/17492
Double Tank/101-30 73022/15851 73022/15851
LT-A-101-30/101-30 29187/15851 29187/15851
8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 77251
9 Nameplate 57652 57652
Tank Assembly 79098 79015
10 Tank Adaptor Assembly 79101 79020
Bursting Disc (Not Shown)
O-Ring (Not Shown) 56909 56909
11 Shell Assembly 79100 79016
12 Nameplate 73760 73761
13 Hose Assembly 79007 79007
14 Enclosure Cover 79325 79325
15 Nameplate 79364 - 79329
OSURE ASSEMBLY
2
A
e—
I e
14
Figure
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
Description
Tank -Enclosure Shipping Assembly
Tank Assembly
Shell
Tank Adaptor Assembly
Bursting Disc (Not Shown)
O-Ring
Nameplate
Enclosure
Cover
Nameplate
Screw
Speed' Nut
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 9-9
s
1.5 Gallon 3.0 Gallon
Part No. Part No.
78921 78929
79098 79015
79100 79016
79101 79020
56909 56909
73760 73761
78405 78405
78406 78406
78922 78930
15362 15362
12042 12042
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 11-1-94 Page 9-10
TANK -BRACKET ASSEMBLY
2`
9
8
Figure 1.5 Gallon 3.0 Gallon
No. Description Part No. Part No.
Tank -Bracket Shipping Assembly 78232 78937
Tank Assembly 79098 79015
1 Shell 79100 79016
2 Tank Adaptor Assembly 79101 79020
3 Bursting Disc (Not Shown)
4 O-Ring 56909 56909
5 Nameplate 73760 73761
6 Bracket Assembly 31937 12063
7 Grommet 14089 14089
8 Grommet 8688 8688
9 Wing Nut 12065
SECTION IX — APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 3-15-95 Page 9-11
REV. 1
WARRANTY AND LIMITS OF WARRANTY
A. Ansul Products
Except as indicated in B below, your R-102 System,. sup-
plied by Ansul Incorporated ("Ansul") is warranted to you
as the original purchaser for five years from the date of
delivery against defects in workmanship and material as pur-
chaser's sole and exclusive remedy, Ansul will replace or
repair any component part which, in its opinion, is defec-
tive and has not been tampered with or subjected to misuse,
abuse or exposed to highly corrosive conditions.
B. Purchased Products
The following items, which are not manufactured but pur-
chased by Ansul, are warranted against defects resulting
from the manufacturer's fabrication, process or parts for one
year from the date of purchase: fusible links, electric gas
shut-off valves, manual reset relay, snap -action switch and
solenoid, detectors, electric manual pull station, pressure
relief valves, and regulators.
Evaluation of each reportedly defective relay, valve, etc.
returned to Ansul will be made by the original manufacturer
or an agent thereof and its judgment shall be final.
C. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN (A) AND (B), THERE ARE NO
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE MADE BY
ANSUL CONCERNING THIS SYSTEM. ANSUL SHALL
HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPE-
CIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES.
For repairs, parts and service of the Ansul System, contact
your local Ansul representative, or Ansul Incorporated,
Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542; 800-TO-ANSUL
800-862-6875).
If 1
ANSUL INCORPORATED
ONE STANTON STREET
MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542
715-735-7411
I
FORM NO./
SECTION PART NO.
l
3
PRE-ENGINEERED SYSTEMS — VEHICLE
Product Group No. 6) (Continued)
CHECKFIRE Detection and Actuation Systems (Continued)
CHECKFIRE SC Electric Detection and Actuation System Parts List F-89170-1
CHECKFIRE Pneumatic Detection and Actuation System Parts List F-81168
CHECKFIRE Electric Detection and Actuation System Parts List F-81280
CHECKFIRE Electric Detection and Actuation System — Series II Parts List F-8757
CHECKFIRE MP System Installation, Recharge, Inspection and Maintenance Part No. 416267
Manual
CHECKFIRE SC Electric Detection and Actuation System Installation, Part No. 79061-01
Recharge, Inspection and Maintenance Manual
Spot Detector Installation Instructions Part No. 416765
CHECKFIRE Electric Detection and Actuation System — Series II Part No. 70699-01
Installation, Inspection and Maintenance Manual
CHECKFIRE Pneumatic Detection and Actuation System Installation, Part No. 55391-01
Inspection and Maintenance Manual
PRE-ENGINEERED SYSTEMS — RESTAURANT
Product Group No. 4)
R-101 Systems
R-101 General Specifications Data Sheet F-75112-7
Ansul R-101-10, R-101-20, and R-101-30 Systems With Pneumatic Actuator F-7426-1
Parts List
Ansul R-101-10, R-101-20, and R-101-30 Systems Parts List F-7427-3
Terminal Detector Assembly and Link and Shield Assembly Parts List F-6999
R-101 Certification, Installation and Inspection Form Part No. 24789-02
R-101 Installation Design Sheet Part No. 24790
Restaurant System Manual Supplement Part No. 77702
R-101 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems Manual Supplement Part No. 70481
R-101-20 Fire Suppression System Installation, Recharge, Inspection and Part No. 17548-06
Maintenance Manual
R-101-30 Fire Suppression System Installation, Operation, Recharge, Part No. 25734-05
Inspection and Maintenance Manual
Accessory Installation Instructions (Applies to R-101-10, R-101-20 Part No. 24488-01
and R-101-30 Systems)
12/13/94 5
I
FORM NO./
SECTION PART NO.
PRE-ENGINEERED SYSTEMS — RESTAURANT
Product Group No. 4)
R-102 Systems
Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems 2-color Brochure F-8879-3
Ansul R-102 MANU-SPEC Sheet F-90138
Ansul R-102 (Standard UL 300 Listed) Data Sheet F-9501
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Agent Data Sheet F-9140
Quik-Seal" Adaptor Data Sheet F-86173-1
Model R-102 Restaurant System Parts List F-8497
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System Dimensions F-8598-1
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System Regulator Test and F-87125
Replacement Instructions
Owner's Guide — Restaurant Fire Suppression System Part No. 418127
Ansul R-102 (UL 300) Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge and Part No. 418087-01
Maintenance Manual
Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems Design, Installation, Part No. 79973-04
Recharge, and Maintenance Manual
DETECTION AND CONTROL
Product Group No. 3)
J
AUTOPULSE IQ-301 Analog Addressable Control Unit Data Sheet F-94101
AUTOPULSE 442R Agent Releasing Control Unit Data Sheet F-94124
AUTOPULSE 442D Deluge/Preaction Control Unit Data Sheet F-94125
AUTOPULSE FOUR Control System Data Sheet F-93204
AUTOPULSE 1000 Control System Data Sheet F-8363-4
AUTOPULSE 2000 and 3000 (Version 2) Control Systems Data Sheet F-87136-1
AUTOPULSE 4000 Control System Data Sheet F-83160-2
Fiber Optic Flame Detection System for Fixed Paint Applications Brochure F-93223
IR-2LF Fiber Optic Flame Detectors and LFX Amplifiers Data Sheet F-9474
Electric Manual Pull Station Data Sheet F-8516-2
Auxiliary Switches Data Sheet F-87100
SLK-24F Photoelectric Smoke Detector Data Sheet F-8970-1
SIH-24F Ionization Smoke Detector Data Sheet F-90121
Alarm Horns Data Sheet F-82349-3
Strobe/Horn Data Sheet F-8430-2
Strobe Alarm Data Sheet F-8660
Alarm Bell Data Sheet F-82351-2
Thermal Detector (Rate Compensated) Data Sheet F-82352-4
4/21 /95 6
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
APP-ICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT
PERMIT ADDRESS n(I/`} R i- C [ t PERMIT NUMBER
Total Contract Price of Job
Describe Work (N-A _ (4%1-1
Type of Construction
Number of Stories
Occupancy: Residential
LEGAL DESCRIPTION
TAX I.D. NUMBER
OWNER
ADDRE
CITY
TITLE HOLDER (IF OTHER THAN OWNER)
ADDRESS
n_.
Number of Dwellings
Commercial
Total Sq. Ft.
Flood Prone (YES) (NO)
Zoning
Industrial
lease attach printout from Seminole County)
CITY STATE
BONDING COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY STATE
ARCHITECT
ADDRESS
CITY STATE
MORTGAGE LENDER
ADDRESS
CITY STATE
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP
CONTRACTOR C o- ( 5ax/ 40 //VC PHONE NUMBER
Ien
ADDRESS [j 61, — ST. LICENSE NUMBER 5F7-3 17J
CITY STATE ZIP7 5
Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as
indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance
of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating
construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured
for ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, SIGNS, POOLS, ETC.
OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the foregoing information is accurate and that
all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction
and zoning. A COPY OF THE RECORDED COPY OF THE; NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT WILL BE POSTED
ON THE JOB SITE WITH PERMITS NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7) DAYS AFTER THE PERMIT HAS BEEN
ISSUED. FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOU PAYING TWICE FOR
THE IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH
YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT.
NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional
restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of
this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental
entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies.
ACCEPTANCE OF PERMIT IS VERIFICATION THAT I WILL NO OWNER OF THE PROPERTY OF
THE REQUIREMENTS OF FLORIDA LIEN LAW, FS713.
ro Z
m o
D A d
O h
Signature of Owner/Agent & Date Signature of Contractor & Date o w
En
Type or Print Owner/Agent Name Type or Print Contractor's Name v 3
m x a
Z >
1 H
VI •-•i
c o
4 o
o.
O N T
Z a E•
Signature of. Notary & Date Signature of. Notary & Date
Official Seal) (Official Seal)
Application Approv BY: Date: L1
FEES: Building % R.dd Police Fire
Open Space Road Impact Ap*
E70G
n L
PERMIT VALIDATION: CHECK CASH
DATEORIGINAL (BUILDING) YELLOW (CUSTOMER) PINK (COUNTY TAX OF LD (CO. ADMIN)
0
x
ro
n
0
a
C
n
D
a
til
THIS APPLICATION USED FOR WORK VALUED $2500.00 OR MORE
CITY OF SANFORD. FLORIDA
PERMIT NO. V1 DATE 1. k.3 — ``'
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE FOL-
LOWING ELECTRICAL WORK:
OWNER'S NAM 57M
ADDRESS OF JOB 4-014Jn1 1 [ L
ELEC. CONTR
sC [ Cr iResi dential Non-residential
Subject to rules and regulations of the city and national electric codes.
Number AMOUNT
Alteration, Addition Re air
Change of Service Residential
Commercial
Mobile Home
Factory Built Housing
New Residential 0-100 Amp_ Service
101-200 Amp Service
201 Amp and a ova
New Commercial Amp ervice
IdOnlicationFee
1 i0n119Mf[t n) {-%3tC Ye ,PLC
I
V -U I
By signing this application I am stating I will be in compliance with a NEC including Article 0. Section 110.9 and 110-10.
i ding Official Master Electrician
STATE COMPETENCY NO.5r_2Vf_
FROM i 1995.10-OS 11l42 #270 P.02/02
LETTER OF AUTHORIZATION
THIS LETTER AUTHORIZES HEATH AND COMPANY, AS OUR LICENSED SIGN
CONTRACTOR (OR THEIR AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS) TO SECURE PERMITS
AND/OR VARIANCES; TO PERFORM SIGN INSTALLATIONS, REMOVALS, OR ANY
SIGN MAINTENANCE NECESSARY AT OUR PROPERTY.
CUSTOMER NNE:
AUTHORISED BY:
STEAK 'N SHAKE
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME THIS
OCTOBER "
a:
J7 ,
19 95
Bml 1 (LYN. HOTgBY _ NY
COKKXSSION EXPIRES: 5TH
DAY OF 9
10 98 RESIDENT
OF MARION COUNTY HEATH
AND COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE: PROPERTY
LOCATION: 40 TOWN CENTER CIRCLE SEMINOLE
TOWNE CENTER SANFORD,
FL 32771
FROM a 1995l10-05 11s42 #270 P.02/02
LETTER OF AUTHORIZATION
THIS LETTER AUTHORIZES HEATH AND COMPANY, AS OtM LICENSED SIGN
CONTRACTOR (OR THEIR AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS) TO SECURE PERMITS
AND/OR VARIANCES; TO PERFORM SIGN INSTALLATIONS, REMOVALS, OR ANY
SIGN MAINTENANCE NECESSARY AT OUR PROPERTY.
I
I
CUSTOMER X MB: STEAK ' N SHAKE
AUTHORI $BD BY z
SWORN TO AND BQBSCRIBED MORE ME THIS
OCTOBER , 19 95
aoTABY BVHLIC:
MY CONKiSSION BXPZRBB: 9 10 98
RESIDENT OF MARION COUNTY
BERTH AND COKPANY REPRESENTATIVE:
PROPERTY LOCATION: 40 TOWN CENTER CIRCLE
SEMINOLE TOWNE CENTER
SANFORD, FL 32771
STH DAY OF
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
APPLICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT
0
H
PERMIT ADDRESS `ICJ
Total Contract Price of Job JkgW4 S> N
Describe Work
PERMIT NUMBER (S _R I0J
Total Sq. Ft.
Type of Construction Flood Prone (YES) (NO)
Number of Stories Number of Dwellings Zoning
Occupancy: Residential Commercial Industrial
LEGAL DESCRIPTION (please attach printou -om Seminole County)
TAX I.D. NUMBER
RSAM—F-32wo SM7.7"
TITLE HOLDER (IF OTHER THAN OWNER)
ADDRESS
CITY
BONDING COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY
ARCHITECT
ADDRESS —
CITY STATE
1i
PHONE NUMBEP10
A. _. 7- 69%7J —00
STATE //V ` ZIP
STATE
STATE
MORTGAGE LENDER
ADDRESS
CITY STATE
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP
CONTRACTOR .1A%L ,S/, 1 ( 0 {ur PHONE NUMBER G ( — I
ADDRESS %'j )f7 Al. 01';5--t ST. LICENSE NUMBER G_T303
CITY Q,( STATE ZIP j7,,430¢
Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as
indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance
of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating
construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured
for ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, SIGNS, POOLS, ETC.
OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the foregoing information is accurate and that
all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction
and zoning. A COPY OF THE RECORDED COPY OF THE NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT WILL BE POSTED
ON THE JOB SITE WITH PERMITS NO LATER THAN SEV17N (7) DAYS AFTER THE PERMIT HAS BEEN
ISSUED. FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOU PAYING TWICE FOR
THE IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH
YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT.
NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional
restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of
this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental
entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies.
ACCEPTANCE OF PERMIT IS VERIFICATION THAT I W , NOTIFY TH OWNER OF THE PROPERTY OF
THE REQUIREMENTS OF FLORIDA LIEN LAW, FS713.
i1r**************i***********tF**** it*rr****** #•* ** ****+k****#***rF*****tF**** H ro Z
M O
D
m
h
n 0a
O H
Signature of Owner/Agent & Date Signature of Contractor & Date o a'<
y
9G,FST Sd/ z
E 4 o
Z >.
1 H
N rl
b w
i 0 0
O v >.
Z o. E•
Type or Print Owner/Agent Name Type or Print Contractor's Name o x
Signature of Notary & Date :signature of Notary & Date
Official Seal) (Official Seal)
Application Approved BY: 29 Date: O
FEES: Building 0 Radon Police ire
Open Space Road mpact. Application
PERMIT VALIDATION: CHECK CASH DATE 1.BY
ORIGINAL (BUILDING) YELLOW (CUSTOMER) PINK (COUNTY TAX OFFICE) GOLD (CO. ADMIN)
O
x
ro
n
0
a
c
n
K
D
Q.
THIS APPLICATION USED FOR WORK VALUED $2500.00 OR MORE
3,
I
2
I
Tp c
p
r
j
I -To P e OT-
II
1 r E LIE'\ rl O
VZ
SIGN NOTES
1. WIND LOAD IN ACCORDANC / S.B,.C. 9t ER100M.P.H. RFGION
2. 2000 P.S.F."MIN. SOIL B ING PRESSURE.
3. CONCRETE SHALL BE 3000 P. .I-. 0 28 DAYS.
4;. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE GRADE 60.
5. STRUCTURAL STEEL: fy-.36.K.S.I.
G. SHOP DRAWINGS OF PRE-ENGINEERED
SIGN FACE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A FLA.
REGISTERED ENGINEER SHALL BE SUBMITTED
TO RICHARDSON ENGINEERING FOR APPROVAL—
PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR'ERECTION.*
7. TUBE *STEEL:" Fy = 466 K:S.I. .
JOB NO: Is .1 TS
PROJECT: %em-
CLIENT: I Er=6',,5 F_ L. (:•
R.ICHARDSON
ENGINEERING
131 ZELMA STREET
ORLANDO F.LOR1DA 32803
3.05 425-4602
GF LA APPLICATIONAPPLICATION ,FOR TEMPORARY
CONSTRUCTIO - ACTIVITIES USE PERMIT
CITY OF SANFORD, A.
p Co
DATE /d _/7- SS PERMIT NO.
To the Building Official:
The undersigned hereby ,applies for a permit for the
following described work:
OWNER S /P, i<
ADDRESS yo l_ n .' P (- -11'
NATURE OF WORK -/
LEGAL DESCRIPTION
APPLICANT'S NAME UA
APPLICANT'S ADDRESS ^ 1< ,-.,I-'/l
APPLICANT'S PHONE NUMBER(-'ii3) G'- .Fe6
L
FEE'
Building Official
6/94) Application type = TCAU
I certify that the above infor-
mation is true and correct and
that I will comply with all
al)plic ble codes and ordinanc(
of t City of Sa d, F
0
li n ' rIArDcaisnto e
r'---'''---'--'---------`-------------- ---------------------'--- ------'''
0
NOVEMBER 1, 1995
CITY OF SANFORD BUILDING DEPARTMENT
300 NORTH PARK AVENUE
SANFORD, FL 32771
SUBJECT: STEAK 'N SHAKE RESTAURANT -
40 TOWNE CENTER CIRCLE
SANFORD, FL 32771
Dear Ladies & Gentlemen:
A Consolidated Products Company
Steak n Shake, Inc.
TEMPORARY POWER
5980 West 71st Street
Indianapolis, IN 46278
317) 388-4400
FAX (317) 387-6590
This letter will serve as our request for temporary power for testing purposes
at the above subject project.
We understand and agree that this energizing of the building will be used solely
for testing and start-up of equipment. Under no circumstances will any personnel
be using.or equipment be used to cook or produce any food products.
We appreciate your assistance in this matter. If you have any questions, or need
any additional information, please don't hesitate to contact me at the above
location -on our letterhead.
Sincerely,
J. Andrew Burtner
Construction Project Manager
CITY OF S.ANFORD, FLORIDA
APPLICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT
PERMIT ADDRESS .4D
Total Contract Price _of ob
Describe Work j
Type of Construction
Number of Stories
Occupancy: Residential
J
PERMIT NUMBER
Total Sq. Ft.A60
Flood Drone (YES)
Number of Dwellings i Zoning _
Commercial _Jr Industrial
NO
LEGAL DESCRIPTION (please attach printout from Seminole County)
TAX I.D. NUMBER
C
OWNER -"i Q N v L-P PHONE NUMBER
ADDRESS
CITY f.3-L, STATE ZIP XL ;
TITLE HOLDER (IF OTHER THAN OWNER)
ADDRESS
CITY
BONDING COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY
ARCHITECT
ADDRESS _
CITY
STATE
STATE
STATE
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP
MORTGAGE LENDER
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP
CONTRACTOR,, 'tv iYY7eJ (1{/UN` PHONE NUMBER`Ul'JO
ADDRESS 6'10 -z- - 0 ST. LICENSE NUMBER
CITY lam, STATE ZIP {r, Z' z
wrr******,t,t,r*,r*rt****,:**rt**tr,t*rr*********isrt***w,t*rt***rr*****rt,r,r***,t,t*,t*w,*,r*,rrt,r***,t*
Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as
indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance
of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating
construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured
for ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, SIGNS, POOLS, ETC.
OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the foregoing information is accurate and that
all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction
and zoning. A COPY OF THE RECORDED COPY OF THE NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT WILL BE POSTED
ON THE JOB SITE WITH PERMITS NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7) DAYS AFTER THE PERMIT HAS BEEN
ISSUED. FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOU PAYING TWICE FOR
THE IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTE:ND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH
YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT.
NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional
restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of
this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental
entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies.
ACCEPTANCE OF PERMIT IS VERIFICATION THAT I
THE REQUIREMENTS OF FLORIDA LIEN LAW, FS713
t****,r***,***rt**,ttr*w*rt**tr*trrt,t**rt*****rt*wrt
0
N
v
N
J-
U
b
0
a
x
0
c
o. 3
0
E x
UI -4
o w
c o
0
0 ro
ZwE•
Si e gn t Owner/Agent & Date
19VI 7 - ei<
yq% 0 ht Owner/Agent Name
61P + n
Signature of Notary & Date
Official Seal)
L NOTIFY THE OWNER OF THE PROPERTY OF
inrtr** w***********tr******r*wrt**** H 'V Z
G M O
10 " r*
M to G+
O f
a u e of Contractor & Date 0 0
R C^rt::o 2 -T f iS ~
y
H F
Z
or Pri t Contractor's Name v B
O N
Ta7(/
o
ro
lg +}
c 1 Y rt
NOTAR LIC, STATE OF FLORIDA
My COMMISSION # CC476424
EXPIRES: June 26, 1999
Application Approved BY: Date: 4
FEES: Building Rad Police ire
Open Space Rd9d Impact Application
PERMIT VALIDATION: CHECK CASH DATE BY
ORIGINAL (BUILDING) YELLOW (CUSTOMER) PINK (COUNTY TAX OFFICE) GOLD (CO. ADMIN)
0
O
a
C
0
r+
Ga
lim
THIS APPLICATION USED FOR WORK VALUED. $2500.00 OR MORE
99dr.nkb
THOMAS SIGN & AWNING COI., INC.
PLEASE EXECUTE CONTRACT AND RETURN
WHITE COPY WITH DEPOSIT. THANK YOUI
SALES AGREEMENT NO. 4841
This AGREEMENT made and entered into this 19th day of September 19 95,
by and between Thomas Sign 8 Awning Company, Inc. Represented by D Sh i rah / P Taylor
hereinafter called Seller, and Steak ' N Shake Andy Burtner
2990 West 71st St., Indianapolis, IN 46268 hereinafter called Buyer.
Job Site: Steak 'N Shake
Sanford, FL 317 388 4400
WITNESSETH: In oo isideration of convenants and agreements hereinafter contained, thu parties agree as follows: Seller will
furnish, as per Sketch No.
We will manufacture approximately 260' lineal
feet of awning, 4' high with 4' projection.
Framing is of rust free Structural Square tube
aluminum heliarc welded. Material used will
be 3M prescreened black and white stripe vinyl
with Graphics Protection System. Lights by
others. $22,932.00
Also manufactured and installed will be a
Drive-thru" awning approximately 8'-6" x 8'-
8" x 4' projection. Material used will be 3M
with GPS. Awning to have white graphics.
2832.00
Lighting by others. All bottoms will be
eggcrate.
Installation of the above described awnings.
5590.00
Electric by others. Permits to be billed at
cost in addition to agreement price.
TERMS: Nmt duo upon -p 1 of• i nn of runrk
COST S 31,354.00
ruusc.
DELIVERY i
SUB TOTAL s 31,354.00
SALES TAX s 2,194.78
SUBTOTAL If 33, 548.78
DEPOSIT t
AMOUNT DUE 33,548.78
CONDITIONS:
It is further agreed by the parties hereto that the word "SIGN" as used below covers all signs and awnings Included in this
contract whether one or more and that:
1. Buyer shall furnish Seller with complete address and plot plan showing exact locations of sign for each job.
2. Customer shall be responsible for adequate electric service to sign area and final electrloal hookup.
3. Since abnormal submerged conditions, such as rock, stumps, gas lines, electric lines, sewer lines, hard pen, water or send
caveins, etc., cannot be foreseen, all hardship costs will be charged to the Buyer.
4. Seller reserves the right to modify or correct sign In any way necessary to conform with any changes in city, county, or state law
regulations or orders and/or conditions beyond Seller's control at job site to Insure proper Installation.
5. Seller shall not be liable for any failure In performance resulting In labor troubles, fires, floods, windstorms, acts of God, war or
other conditions or contingencies beyond Its control.
6. In the event location Is not In readiness for Installation when sign manufacture Is complete -90%of total contract shall be paid to
Seller Immediately.
7. Permlt(s), if required, shall be billed at cost on final Invoice.
6. In the event of a breach of contract by the Buyer before erection of said sign, Buyer shall Immediately pay Seller for costs
Incurred In labor and material to date.
9. ThIscontract shallapplytoand bind theheirs, executors, administrators. successors. and assigns ofBuyer,andshall inure tothe benefit
of the Seller, his successors and assigns. 10.
Electrical permit to be furnished by customers electrician. 11.
INTEREST: Any payment amounts not paid when due shall accrue Interest at the highest legal rate of Interest allowed bylaw. 12.
ATTORNEYS FEES AND COSTS: In any litigation arising out of this contract, the pre alling party shall be entitled to recover a reasonable
attorney's fees and costs. DEALER (
SELLER) By
n Rhirnh / P T+ylnr Sale.
Representstive) Approved
this +_-+* day of Scptcmbcr 19
9§ .at Clearwater, FL By
Selby)
Title
CUSTOMER (
BUYER) Accepted
by Buyrr This
day of _ , 19 Company
Nama By
Buyer
Title
4590
118TH Avenue North • Clearwater, FL. 34622 Pinellas (
813) 573-7757 • Hillsborough (813) 932-4014
L E T T E R O F A U T H O R I Z A T I O N
Date: SEPTEMBER 22, 1995
Customer: Steak'N Shake
Address: 5980 W. 71st Street
Indianapolis IN 46278
Phone #:
Work Order #:
Job Name: STEAK 'N SHAKE
Address:. 40 TOWN CENTER CIRCLE
SANFORD FL 32771
Phone #k :
I/We hereby authorize Thonas Sign & Awning Company -Inc_., to pull permit/permits, and install sign/signs and/or awnings at the above referenced location.
Customer
Customer
J. ANDREW BURTNER
Construction Project Manager
STEAK 'N SHAKE
NOTARY AC NOWEEDQIENT
STATE OF I ND I ANA
COUN'i'Y OF MAR I ON
Thy s is to Cer4.ify tliat on this 2 2ND day of SEPTEMBER , 199.5 , before me., the undersigned, a Notary Public in and for the State of INDIANAduly. arnnissioned and sworn, personally appeared ,J . ANDREW BURTNERknowntbmeandtomeknowntobetheperson/perso T and he/she they acknowledgedtomethathe/she/they executed the foregoing instrument freely and voluntarily.
In witness hereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed by official seal, the day and year first written above.
al ,
Public
LYNDA L. REID) Resident of Marion County
My CaRmission expires: 9 / 10 / 9 8 .
000t--c 00000000 o
Certificate of Flame Resistance_ I \STC I
REGISTERED FABRIC ISSUED BY
Ell OR Date treated or
CONCERN NUMBER monvfoctvred I
n, •''O F-420.0
aEtr II
This is to certify that the materials described on the reverse side hereof have been flame-
retardent treated (or are inherently nonflammable). IIFORThomasThSign & Awning ADDRESS 10990 49th Street No. CITY
Clearwater STATE FL 34622 I Certificationisherebymadethat: (Check "a" or "b") a)
The articles described on the reverse side of this Certificate hove been treated with a flame-retardant I IchemicalapprovedandregisteredbtheStateFireMarshalandthattheapplicationofsaidchemicalnPP9YPPJ
was done in conformance with the laws of the State of California and the Rules and Regulations of the
State Fire Marshal. I INameofchemicalusedChem. Reg. No. IMethod
of application I b)
The articles described on the reverse side hereof are made from a flame -resistant fabric or material registered
and approved by the State Fire Marshal for such use. PI &
ITradenameofflame -resistant fabric or material used PANAF'LEX PII Reg. No. F-420.01 I The
Flame Retardant Process Used Be Removed By Washing I IBy
Frank L. Deyak Technical Service M r. I I Nameo/ Applicatof or Prodvction Svpefintendent Name /t Title FR-3
1 OOo ODOO[
OOO DO THIS REPRODUCIBLE
ARTWORK IS FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF STATE FIRE MARSHAL LICENSED CONCERNS AND INDIVIDUALS
FOR THE PRODUCTION OF REQUIRED FORMS.
CALIFORNIA
STATE FIR)]' MARSHAL
REGISTERED FLAME
PRODUCT
REGISTRATION N01.
PRODUCT NAME:
PANAFLEX SUBSTRATE
PRODUCT MARKETED BY:
RESISTANT
F-420.01 '
3 M COMMERCIAL GRAPHICS DIVISION
3 M Center, Bldg. 207-BW-09
St. Pail, MN 55144-1000
This product meets the minimum requirements of flame resistance established y
the State Fire Marshal for products identified in. the California Health and
Safety Code Section 13115.
The scope of 'the approved use of this product is provided in the current
edition of "California Approved List of Flame Retardant Chemicals and Fabrics,
General and Limited Application Concerns."
DUANE MATTH,k4S, Program Coordinator
Laboratory/Chemicals/Fabrics
CITY OF SAWMD, FLORIDA
PERMIT NO. q5, 3 ` (P7 DATE q -C,-'? 9 -qk5
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE
FOLLOWING H.A.R.V. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
OWNER'S NAME -,tk - N-SAo L-e
ADDRESS OF JOB 7O Coke G/P
MECHANICAL CONTR.
RESIDENTIAL COMMERCIAL /C
Subject to rules and regulations of Sanford mechanical code.
NATURE OF WORK
r /7bo 03
FUEL
MOTOR H.P.
B.T.U. INPUT OUTPUT I II
APPLICATION FEE
TOTAL IL4 J Q r_
l
COMPETENCY CARD NO.
TROPIC-KOOL'kENGINEERING
C4RP
September 18, 1995
City of Sanford
P.O. Box 1788
Sanford, FL 32772-1788
Dear Gentlemen:
Please accept this Letter of Authorization for ROB STAUFFER
to pull the Mechanical Permits for the STEAK N' SHAKE located at
40 TOWN CENTER CIRCLE, SANFORD, FL.
ROB STAUFFER is a representative of Tropic-Kool Engineering
Corp., and is authorized to pull this permit in my behalf.
Your cooperation in this matter is greatly appreciated, and
should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact
me at (813) 581-2824, ext. 3024.
Sinc ly,
P (Phil) Ardis
General Manager
JPA/sh
r
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF PINELLAS
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME THIS 18TH V lI.Q.,SEPTEMBER
1995. 1a
7 p Qt+ O *2T
1 0 .i,. •ice.•
rNA
i r
NOT Y 60C 824.557 ' T
1232 Donogan Road Largo, Florida 34641 (813) 581.2824 Fax: (813) 587.7973
CA C051478 CM C053194
CITY OF SANFORD. FLORIDA
PERMIT NO. 301 _ DATE ?- 13 — 95--
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE FOL-
LOWING ELECTRICAL WORK:
OWNER'S NAME -5f4!5 ' & _5Wo
S'EA•i vcLc= T w.v C Lsiv%t /.,sc-L
ADDRESS OF JOB '/o 7"O"'V i Cy7L, C,CC,
ELEC. CONTR_ F.eal Lc%C. F-5 _Residential__ Non-residential
Subject to rules and regulations of the city and national electric codes.
Number AMOUNT
Alteration Addition, Repair
Chance of Service Residential
Commercial
Mobile Home
Factory Built housing
New Residential 0-100 Amp_Service
101-200 Am Service
201 Amp an above
New Commercial /po0 Amp Service 00
Application Fee 00
I
i
TOTAL
By signing this application I am stating [will be in compliance with the NEC including Article 110. Section 110.9 and 110.10.
Building Official Masfor E elrician
STATE COMPETENCY NO. /.?900
CIt1141NFORD. FLORIDA
PERMIT NO U— DATE / / / 9
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE FOL-
LOWING PLUMBING WORK:
OWNER'S NAME S 74-6 // G — Al — S /Q ` - e
ADDRESS OF JOB °1 0 % W ,, e Geri 6.- C L r c.
PLUMBING CONTR T46 r to „^ I Res. _ Comm.
Subject to rules and regulafions of Sanford plumbing code.
Residential: I Number Amount
Alteration, Addition, Repair
New Residential:
One Water Closet
Additional Water Closet
Commercial:
Fixtures. Floor Drain, Trap 2 o
Sewerr
Water Piping
Gas Piping
Factory -built housing
Mobile Home
Application Fee
Minimum Commercial Permit: $25. oo Total
Master Plumber
COMPETENCY CARD NO C F C 02 3 4 2 '
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
PERMIT NO. "/ - / DATE l ZB (?S
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY APPLIES FOR A PERMIT TO INSTALL THE
FOLLOWING H.A.R.V. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
OWNER'S NAME T-G
ADDRESS OF JOB 'C ItLAJ`J CAN ftC
MECHANICAL CONTR.e--
T k: 407- 3G - C7 boo
RESIDENTIAL COMMERCIAL
Subject to rules and regulations of Sanford mechanical code.
NATURE OF WORK
FUEL
MOTOR H.P
B.T.U. INPUT OUTPUT --
VALUATION %CU, PY7["1-.c3
APPLICATION FEE I 11 /0 PO
UMaster Mechanical
COMPETENCY CARD NO. U
ch,1-39
fTHARP
Purveyors Of Fine Plumbing
To Whom It May Concern:
Please be advised that I, James W. Tharp, Jr. do hereby give
W 0 I (cL Y• W V a, V 'Power of Attorney to pull0
the necessary permits for the Plumbing at Sid l e ,- S. ke
in sa., Fee- d ^ Florida.
Respectfully,
TIiARP PLUMBING SYSTEMS, INC.
J W. Tharp, Jr. .
President
STATE OF FLORIDA
County of Orange
L
I, the undersigned authority, hereby certify that the fore-
going is a true and correct copy of the instrument presented
to me -by James W. Tharp, Jr. as the original of such instrutments.
t
Witness my hand and official seal, this
t
day of sQ,P c e-,
NOTARY// PUOLIC
My commission expires:
01ft&
gyp MARCIELEWIS
MY C MMisslon CC473463
Expires Jul. 09, 1999
y ce Bonded by HAI
800-422-1555
THARP PLUMBING SYSTEMS INC
625 WILMER AVE ORLANDO FL 32808
407-295.2370 FAX 407-293.2376
6 Lo l
a c
I vY s
CITY 'OF SANFORD
FIRE:DEPARTMENT
FEES FOR SERVICES
PHONE A An7-322-4952
TE : ?3/ PERMIT 41: - 9
SINESS N TyJ 75hR1'/_ DRESS: %
i, L' cr, i o_r C' J l E
NUMBER:( ) PLANS
REVIEW . TENT PERMIT BURN
PERMIT REINSPECTION TANK
PERMIT FIRE SYSTEM AMOUNT $ -
2o?• 60 COMMENTS:
C O,-
7
36 30 Sg L7- Fees
must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park
Avenue, Sanford, Florida. Phone # 330-5656. Proof
of payment must be made to Sanford Fire Prevention bef
re any furthe services can take place. Sanford
Fire Prevention I
certify that the above information
is true and correct
and that I will comply
with all applicable code4and
inances of the Cird,
Florida. t-
Applgnature
CITY OF SANFORD
FIRE:DEPARTMENT
FEES FOR SERVICES
PHONE #: 407-322-4952
DATE: PERMIT #: -
BUSINESS NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE NUMBER:(
PLANS REVIEW TENT PERMIT
BURN PERMIT REINSPECTION
TANK PERMIT FIRE SYSTEM
AMOUNT $-2
COMMENTS: /n . S 42 zl X ,-e- i-%-7/1, P
A %Dvn CohSTi Gio.
Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N.
Park Avenue, Sanford, Florida. Phone # 330-5656.
Proof of payment must be made to Sanford Fire Prevention
before any further services can take place.
I certify that the above
information is true and
A correct and that I will
comply with all applicable
codes and ordinances of the
City of Sanford, Florida.
c
Sanfor ' Fi P evention App cants Signature
09/30/95 10:22 a 002
Auquet 20, 199S
ow -ow goon. E"cu" o•ec ta-
prm R. W hh, AoWWO Er"*'o oaro+o,
MOM, T. M0, 0. 000 M AuUtO'H E--XWO Owda
POST OFFICE BOX 9 PALATKA, FLORIDA 32176-1429
SUNCCM 90yeea4m
mt) 960SN."N Wo
o>D
W $60-MW uf 1A•Cfl ffP eoE
rwXGWgua,SnsGuXP''1m o
419 ! aw0 a•.w isa sEp+•aw• WW
Ila 309 Far anw 2133K NW+ A••• pr,
d s•ana ar+ a,rO. stirs Moe" •.
nrr• a:an• r eawr•. aeesa a ann•
aum irr•"'a• G
rp 407401r470 aD""'"°
A
auPal7CMg 40r(u1-1=a roe
aW031)- aoo too .aPna+r• CONSOLIDATZD
pRODUCTS, STEAK N SUM;, INC. 500
CKNTORY BVZLDINO 36
S. pSNNSVLVAN1A STREET INDIAKhpoLIS,
IN 46204 suancT,
management and Storage of Surface Waters General
pervolt Number 40-117-0310 Dear
Sir/Madam: o[
the St. is
your general permit &a the staff ed
JohnsaRiver
Water Management DistrictthorLxed onAugusty28, 1995- and
should be kept with your other ThisPermitisnlegaldocumentd
Completion Report should be important
documentsfice within thirty days after the filled The
attache
in and
returned to the Palatka of you will enable us to schedule a work isCompleted. By so doing, prompt inspsetion
of the pezloitted activity- lotionoxt, Your
permit also cont in addition
to the camp repains l of
conditions which
require submittaad0itncondltionetmust bell information submitted as
compliance of submitted to the
palatka office address. ve YOQ rom
ty permit issuance done
not re iefedQsalt ateeand/or localagencies of obtaining permits from
Y asserting concurrent jurisdiction for
this work. the event you sell
your property, the pernnit will be In In the ed
tothe new
owner, if tie are notified by you within thirty days of the
sales.?IorsthoIInow tus in his tter
so.
as propertyownor to maintain a valid permit pay
owT. Marden,awar+ a,wria
0M Rosdh.T w1 01M -
I I.
Mconv, Yam S.
0iawoVA*O40MW1 M `"O
M q ldNFshes n.Agum" hma+ T.
Swvn I. 61
W Ifilllf
Oom Ka f
cl*"Gdft „pow Moses" 06VV-
6Z£-d06 :ON
131tjJW
11
WN3d NH01' 1S - Q I Z T : 60 Q311 S6 , -0£-9f lti
09/30/95 10:23 Q 003
I
i
i
Thank you for your cooperation and if this office can be of
any further assistance to .you, please do not hesitate to contact
uo.
Sincerely,
MOA&'ha
Marsha Baldwin, Data Control Technlotan
Permit Data services
Enclosureso Permit with completion Report
Notice of Rights
ccs District Files
INT'ERFLAA PRACTICE, LTD
ATT5 s yJaRIM McCOIG , F . 3 .
933 LSE ROAD, SUITS 120
0RLANDO, FL 32810
06"_6Z£-v06 :ON -a, d1W 1 I wd3d NHof 1S c a i ZT :60 a3M S6 OZ--9(ki
09/30/95 10:24 9 004
i aAMV paa,n, Care.,w. otr.e+ar
torn R. Wat". A nbkw%f fu.aen.a•'a 0*006W
OYat+o.
chod a T. M"" 0.080%01 Ankomf eamuo +
32176-1429PALATy.KA
T. POST OFFICE BOX 1420 F.L OR(I/D A
g w
iAD 9AfIDw
IOK!
larar TIAMm'a'
fiEA1M'ft f>L apem
sne.ro++ t+s>tKwr.tiAr
MM VAR 00
ma..,a., f.Mfa aal a M7Qt+7r l ffilnE
A' aff-mo
no ,m00744100 Wo *Now—
a7aM.a
n0o '0170dyo foe Awn"-am
PERMIT NO. 40-117-0310 DAT8 ISSUED August 20, 199S
A pZRMIT AUTHORIZUMS
CONSTRUCTidff AMD OPERATION OF A BURPACE WATER MMI&ASMENT SYSTEM FOR
A 0.946 x = , STEAL N SHAME RESTAURANT DRAINING TO A PRgVIOUSLY
PW%MITTBD MASTER SYSTEM.
IochTIOg: section 29, TOWnahip 19 South, Range 30 East, asminole County
ISSUED TOs
CONSOLIDATED PRODUCTS. STEAL a 3.9"B' INC.
Soo CXVTURY BUILDIM
36 S. PswNSYLVAMZA STREET
INDIANhpMIs, IU 46204
permitted agrees to hold and save the St. Johne River "te"
mar
MM&ncl ant
Diatrivt and its successors harmisas from anyiasand a. said
es'
appel&
i=' or
liabilities which stay &Kiss from p tce.
S
is
by rdferen, includingall. plane and specifications attached steed
a part hereot. This
permit dodo not convey to permitted any property rights 'nor anY rights
or privileges other than tlfoo• °ailationeorireguirementeve the Pam
from ccoplyinQ with any low, reg affecting
the rights of irNrhereuad r sbodi,00
or h l rsimainathell sproPertYeot the works installed
by pesmi permitted. This
Permit
May be revoked, modified or transferred at any time pursuant to the
appropriate provision• of Chapter 373, Florida statutees prRIQT IS
CONDITIOUED OPM c see conditions
on attached 'Exhibit A', dated August 28, 199S AUTHORIZED art
at. Johno {tivar Water Kanagsmnt District Departmnt of
Resource Management gave in d e By. .
Bye (
AM
8
CRETARY) DZ ) LAMW
DEAN JLFT RLLSDGs .
7 L
am
Rom,
Otla w on, s.rn T. lS
rrin.ar f Wtlsa gp l vKs awwrw Fddo n..+arM
T. dmo w.r.aMM . a K tlgr
C1iYfs11 awe QWP
A6
obi ~ Janes
H.
dDuA a
a
oanaft smom
cow rasnau
06yb_
6ZZ_
y66 :0N -31 ti1W 1 I "dad NHOf IS a Q I £T :60 aw S6 0£-Cryd
09/30/95 10:25 9 005
ZXKIBIT A"
CONDITIONS iOR ISSUANCE Op pB1WIT HVMBER 40-117-0310
CODISOLIDATZD PRODUCTS, STEM V SHAM INC.
AUGUST 29, 199S
1. Prior to lot or unit sales, or upon Completion of construction
of the system, whichever occurs first, the District must
receive the final operation and maintenance decumsnt(s) approved
by the District and recorded, if the latter is appvopr
those systems which are proposed to be maintained by county or
municipal entities, final operation and maintenance documents
must be received by the District when maintenance and operation
of the system Is accepted by -the local goverment entity. allure to submit the appropriate final document will result in
the permittee remaining personally liable for carrying out
maintenance and operation of the permitted system.
4. All construction, operation and maintenance shall be as set
forth -in the plans, epacifications-and performance criteria
an approved by this POrmit.
3_ District. authorised staff, upon proper identification.
will have permiesion to enter, inspect and observe the
system -to insure conformity with the plans and specifications
approved by the permit.
4. The permittee must implement and maintain all erosion and
sediment control measures (best management practices)
required'to retain:sediment on -sits and to'prevent
violations of the water quality criteria and standards in
ObVtsre 17-4, 17-301, F.A.C. All practices must be in
accordance with the guidelines and specifications in
section 6 of the Florida Land Development Manuals A Guide
to sound Land and pater Management (Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation 1988) unlees a project -specific
erosion and sediment control plan is approved as part of
the permit in which ease this fPracticessite mustific
be In
ions
accordance with the plan.
require additional measures during any phase ofconstructionoroperationtoyreventerosionor control
sediments beyond those specified in the erosion
sediment control plan, the permittee must imp
additional best management practices as necessary, in
accordance with the specifications in section 6 of the
Florida Land Development Manuals A Guide to sound Land
and Water Management (Florida Dopartment of Rnvironmental
Regulation, 19aa).
S. Stabilisation measures shall be initiated for erosion and
sediment control on disturbed areas so soon as
practicable in portions of the site where construction
U.LW l I WJ Bd N of 1S : Q 1 bi :60 a3M S6 ,-0£-9-b
09/30/95 10:25 0 006
activities have temporarily or permanently ceased, but in
no case more than 14 days after the construction activity
in that portion of the site has temporarily or
permanently ceased.
6. The operation phase of the permit shall not become .
sffsctive until a Florida registered profe**i0A41
Engineer certifies that the systen, or independent
portion of a system, has been eonatructed in accordance
with the permit issued by the District, and the permittee
receives written notification by District staff that the
construction, alteration, or maintenance has been
complated.according to the permit. within 30 days after
completion of construction of the surface water
management system, or independent portion of the system,
the permittee shall submit the certification or one net
of plane which reflect the surface water management
synem as actually constructed. Thin submittal shall
ssrvs to notify the District that the system is ready for
inspection. The permit may not be transferred to an
operation and maintenance entity approved by the District
until the operation phase or the permit becomes
effective.
7. zf any other regulatory agency should require revision*
or modification to the permitted project, the District is
to be notified of the revisione so that a determination can
be made whether a permit modification is required.
8. The District must be notified, in writing, within 30 days of any
sale, conveyance, or other transfer -of a permitted system or
faoilIty or within 30 days of any transfer of ownership or
control of the real property at which the permitted. system or
fsd,lity is loosted. All transfer* of a permit are' subject
to the requirements of section 40C•-1.612, F.A.c.
9. she permittee must require the contractor to review and
maintain a copy of this permit, complete with all
conditions, attachments, exhibits, and modifications in
good condition at the construction site. The complete
permit shall be available for review upon request by
District representatives.
10. construction or alteration of each phase or independent
portion of the permitted surface water management system
eyste ) must be completed in accordance with the
permitted plans and permit conditions prior to the
initiation of the permitted use of site infrastructure
located within the area served by that portion or phase
of the system. Each phase or independent portion of the
system must be Complete in accordance with the permitted
09/30/95 10:26 Q 007
Plane and permit conditions prior to transfer of
responsibility for operation and maintenance of that
phase or portion of the system to local government or
other responsible entity.
11. To the extent permitted by Florida law, the permittee
must hold and save the District harmless from any and all
liability arising from property damage or personal injury
as a result of the permitted activities.
12. Nothing contained heroin relieves the permittee from
timely complying with applicable laws or other federal,
state, or. local governments.
13. If an entity other than.the permittee has been approved
as the operation and maintenance entity, the permittee
may request transfer of the permit for a completed system
or independent portion of a system to the District
approved operation and maintenancm entity at the time of
submittal of the as -built@ or Professional Engineer
certification for construction of the permitted surface
water management system.
14. This permit for construction will expire five years from the
date of issuance.
15. construction or alteration of the surface water management
system must be completed and all disturbed areas must be
stabilized in accordance with permitted plans and permit
conditions prior to any of the following events (whichever
occurs first)i issuance of a certificate of occupancy, use of
the infra -structure for its intended use; or transfer of
responsibility for operation and maintenance to a local
government or other responsible entity.
16. All wetland areas or water bodies that are outside of
the specific limits of construction authorized by this
permit must be protected from ere@ion, siltation, scourinq
or excess turbidity, and devatering.
17. Prior to construction, the permittee must clearly designate
the limits of construction on-eite. The permittee must advise
the contractor that any work outside the limits of construction,
including clearing, is a violation of this permit.
18. The operation and maintenance entity shall submit inspection
reports to this District two years after the operation
phase permit becomes effective and ovary two years thereafter
on District foss sN-46. The inspection form must be signed
and sealed by an appropriate registered professional.
19. The proposed project must be constructed and operated
in accordance with the plans received by the District
on July 31, 1995, sheets Cl-C3, C-4 and L-l.
1.0d Z46a 06"-6Z£-VW:ON -al C1t1Q 1IWd3d NHOf 1S:0I ST:60 ail S6.-0£-9fki
OCT 13 195 09:44 TO CITY OF SANFORD FROM Seminole County BCC T-589 P.E1
4/Q jak/ CVX T-tA- Jff-t,
SEMINOLE COUNTY GOVERNMENT
Comprehensive Planning
1101 East First Street
Sanford, Florida 32771
DATE: October 13, 1995
Fax Cover Sheet
TIME: 9:39 AM
TO: Sybal Willamson PHONE: 407/330-5600
City of Sanford !FAX: 214/330-5666
FROM: Phyllis Wallac PHONE: 407/321-1130, ext. 7356
Seminole Coun FAX: 407/324-4818
RE: Steak and Shake Seminole County Impact Fee Refund. Per our
conversation today, if you could refund Steak & Shake directly the $41,138.79
paid to the City, I would be very appreciative. This request is due to a calculation
error on my part. I will take responsibility for contacting the applicant directly and
making sure the correct amount is paid. Thanks for your assistance on this
matter. Should you need any further information, please feel free to contact me.
NUMBER OF PAGES INCLUDING COVER ONE (1).
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL Interplan Practice Ltd.
c,ry gr SAS rnto 8- o c, PrPT,
To
NG
Attention
Architecture/Engineering/Interior Design
AA-0001302
933 Lee Road, Ist Floor
Orlando, Florida 32810
Telephone 407.645-5008
Fax 407.629-9124
I NTERPLAN
P R A C T I C E
9390 Project
No. J'.
L9.pS Date
We
are sending via 33,
0 5-6G8 r (
Telephone
syf!
L n iccJt tJGiyll O l %Buln2 vt7/' Project
V45A2 ",
OaYtd vta s Subject
Copies
Sets Date Description Remarks )
G GiO K-IC— Kc-""S q
1' er ewpq-ram /z ay
cc -
DEstablishment Nome _
Mr. mw"sw
Establishment location
Ad*M red usn
Owner Name
ee., f c6 ?L.uy feu
fV 47O Iiyiysrc f •p s
a rTq o S.
r
oi;Z0
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION
Division of Hotels and Restau"""'lia:9
APPLICATION FOR -a "'°" e"„'`
PLAN REVIEW -AIL 2 4 RECD
106NUMBER
W 1 ?-5- sue/
DIV. Of HOTELS & RLSIAUkAWTS
Please Print of type DISTRICT I i
The applicant is to submit this cohipleted application with plans
Redo FriellT IMuirriritluiii - , ; ° , o,
P[New Construction Food service establishments closed`
Conversion of existing Remodeling of existing food service
structure to food service
Noma of existing public food service etttashlishtrent,: , ,;;
BPR license number of existing public food sanks.establlshinerit:j,
U- GrzlG • Sa.nr{n'rL'i
3,271
G.
Menu Information: Types of food involved and method of service. Attach a copy of
proposed menu
cawbrc rsu's_ •ffg , ft-r'b , n'.tnts aada
Waste Water Disposal. Prior to the opening inspection, the applicant must provide written
approval for waste water disposal from the appropriate agency MRS County Public Health
Unit, Department of Environmental Protection, municipality or sewer district). Written ep•
proval may be a copy of a permit or letter signed by the authority having juistfiction.
Will your astablishement be served by:
A. septic tank system? Yes ®No
B. package sewer plant? Yes RNo
C. municipallutility sewer? j8 Yes No
If you answered YES to item B or C, complete the following:
Name of municipallutility agsncy-5muine/e 4wmn f
Size of groan troy: 7DOD gel. Location: Duft;de ! 2 PVyhd
Water Supply. Prior to the opening inspection the applicant must provide written approval
for a potable water supply from the appropriate agency MRS County Public Health Unit,
Department of Environmental Protection, municipality or sewer district). Written approval
may be a copy of a form or letter signed by the authority having jurisdiction.
Will your establishment be served by:
A. or site water well? Yes No
B. municipallutility water? P9 Yes No
h/!
CAl
It existing structure, provide deserlption lexampler steel warehouse,
old wood from builft in historic district):
Note: Construction finish schedules of floor, wells and ceiling must be
provided on floor plans
M Solid Waste Disposal.
Type of Storage Container let 'A w'Orl-e x
Waste water from cleaning containers disposed on site? Yes 'WNe
1111VAll establishment have an Alcoholic Beverage License? Yes of No
If Yes, the establishment must meet all the sanitary retpriements of the state before the '
department staff may s'rm the application for beverage license. AN re"ad egmepnment and
futures must be insteled and operating properly before approval car be Wren pursuant to
s.561.17(2), Florida Statutes.
10Employser. Provide information on the anticipated umber and type of workers (such as: .
kitchen workers, wait staff, cooks). The information should pro" the total raanber of
workers, maximum per shift and hours of establishment. operation:
Projected Service Capacity: Number of Seats ?7
OConstruction: Anticipated Start Completion / I LS
M" an Tow moo Ow Tr
Plans are rsvlewed on a fast•con•; first•nrvsd bash. Fbrids law slows 30 dsyr for kii. ii*; After
plens us approved and construction Is comphte, pirsse contact * drl" district offlea far ainspectionIfyoudonotcurrentlyMidaBPRlicenseforthisastsblibmrt, submittal of as Applei
tion for Liens mad the appropriate licann fin is roW d before the &Ai os will sciedda The opaimiq
inspection
If you answered YES to item B, complete the following: ololloer
Name of municipallutility agency 01h, SQ,r„ red _YA E % 123 19S
il SIGNATURE OF APPLICANT MONTH DAY YEAR
The plan reviewer will notify the responsiblelagent when the plan review is completed
LOG NUMBER)IX! - 9534
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS REGULATION
DIVISION OF HOTELS AND RESTAURANTS
SPECIFICATION WORKSHEET
OFFICE USE ONLY
1. Establishment Name: 3+eflil
ATTACH TO APPLICATION
2. Type Review: New stablishment: () Extensively Remodeled () Remodeled
ffNew Construction greater thin 50% asiaied value 50% assessed value or less
Conversion
Closed for 3 or more years
3. Construction Finishes:
Floor* Wall Ceiling
Food Prep All Agras mu!,,r v tbS Food
Storage AA, 12 CA SrL.4 cLe7 Ard A4 Lc - Wash
Area Rest
Rooms Covering
materials: A4,V S r r3 6- Srw6D'Ttit Lkie_ PMy ieus a Ehs to y e LewN,*aie Key:
S - Satisfactory U - Unsatisfactory' NA -
Not Applicable C -
Caution (information inadequate or potential operational violation, will be checked
during inspections) 4.
C, Floors graded to floor drains 5. _
C., No unnecessarily exposed utility lines, pipes on floors 6. _(
L No exposed studs, joists, rafters allowed in walk-ins, food preparation, dish washing areas
or toilet rooms. If exposed in other areas, they must be cleanable 7. --
C,— Wall panels, coverings closed at joints, sealed to wall and ceiling 8.
Comments: DBR
21-011 Page I of 4 Rev. 11-24-92
LOG NUMBER
Sinks/Dishmachines
9. Sanitizing facilities provided when potentially hazardous food prepared and/or customer
dishes re -used: (,) 3 compartment sink ()O:dishmachine
10. _ Sinks with drain boards (or equiv.), backsplash, self -draining
No. shown: s8- 4, _1 39 _:ft= 2 compartments
11. _ Adequate facilities to air dry dishware, utensils, equipment
12. _C Adequate facilities to store cleaned and soiled utensils, equipment
13. s_ One compartment food prep sinks. No. shown ...i
14. S Hand sink(s) in food prep area(s). No.'shown I-
15. S_ Hand sink in remote mechanical dishwash area
16. _S_ Mop wash facility, located: &,1t t y 17. _
c- Hot and cold water supplied to all sinks where required 18. _
C Compartments sized to accommodate equipment 19.
Dishmachine Model 20.
Chemical 1800 1650 _ booster 21.
Comments: Fire
Safety 22.
C Automatic, portable extinguishing equipment provided as needed 23.
S_ Means of egress 24. _
L- Gas appliances 25.
Comments: KA,, sT =e ter G 02 % a C-0 c H c F(vc Aut-W T-Y Equipments
Instollation/Design 26.
c Ice produced and stored in protected area 27. _.
Displayed food protected 28. _`
Running water dipper well for bulk ice cream service 29.
c Beverage tubing installed properly 30.
S_ Adequate storage facilities (dry & refrigerated) 31. _
c- Open shelving to be at least 6" above floor 32.
c Equipment designed to facilitate cleaning, e.g., no raw wood, pegboard, contact paper 33.
C Equipment installed to facilitate cleaning, e.g., easily cleaned beneath, behind, between 34. _
r Tabletop equipment, not easily movable, not sealed shall be on legs at least 4" high 35. _
C Floor mounted equipment, not easily movable, not sealed shall be on raised platforms or
on legs at least 6" high 36. '
C Designated area for employee belongings 37.
C Laundry facilities properly located 38. _
C Adequate storage area for maintenance and cleaning equipment 39.
Comments: Lighting
40. _
r Adequate lighting provided. Minimum 20 ft-c on working surfaces, 10 ft-c on other surfaces
41.
C_ Lights shielded, coated, covered where food stored, prepared, displayed where food is open
or exposed DBR
21-011 Page 2 of 4 Rev. 11-24-92
LOU NUMBER
Ventilation
42. — All rooms and equipment that produce appreciable quantity of steam, obnoxious odors, fumes, vapors, grease, smoke to be vented to outside43. _r Intake and exhaust air ducts properly designed and installed
Premises
44. C_ Walking and driving surfaces shall be constructed to minimize dust and graded topreventpoolingofwater
45. r,_ Doors to exterior self -closing, open outward
Plumbing
46. _L Backsiphonage and backflow protection if no air gap/break47. C Faucets with hose fitting to have backflow protection device48. r Refrigeration waste piping shall discharge indirectly into floor drain or receptor
approved by local plumbing authority. 49. ' C Food contact surfaces shall not be placed under exposed sewer lines. 50. Location of hot water heater(s)
51, Rest rooms:
Rest rooms
Public
Males
WC Urin.
Females
WC I . Lay.
52. C Hot and cold water to all lavatories used by employees53. _C Rest rooms vented or provided with windows to outside54. _' Doors to be self -closing
55. _$_ Rest rooms accessible by customers without going through food preparation areas56. The plumbing standard is:
So. Stand. So. Fl, Inn -In r~eV
Other (specify) - -- -- - - -
57. Comments:
58. G Waste container, grease receptacle, compactor on smooth non-gbsorbent surface59. _r. Compactor area drained to sanitary sewer60. _C Wastewater from cleaning of containers drained to sanitary sewer61. Comments: _ Y,„. , I
DBR 21-011
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 11-24-92
lop
LOG NUMBER
V*ater Supply
62. Type of Supply; Municipal/Utility .
On -Site well Other
63. Name of Supplier _ Ci rt „ .F C,,,,. , .
64. Written approval for use issued by P rsvidm J p/
65. Public Well Permit No.
66. Comments:
Waste Water Disposal
67. Type of System: Municipal/Utility X_ Pkg.Plant OSDS68. Written approval for use issued by PjqA ne p m,4e_4_
69. Name of System _ cpA",,; yuI
70.OSDS Permit No: Tank Size _ gal. Drainfield sq.ft. 71. Grease Trap _ 4 n n gal. Location of grease trap72. Comments:
Seating Capacity
73. Maximum seating capacity as designated on the plans _ Q q
74. Plans Approved with noted provisos to be corrected
Plans Denied RESUBMIT corrected plans as indicated.
75. Comments:
All Items Will Be Verified During Construction And Opening Inspections. Establishment is to meet all standards of Chapter 509, F.S., and Chapter 7•C, F.A.C.
Plans Reviewed by
Applicant Signature
Date _ ?1_ -
7 -9 5—
Date S /U // 9 5
U
Print Name) J O 5 Q h 1 1 S r) (yell)
DBR 21-011
Page 4 of 4 Rev. l 1-24-92
Whole Building Performance Method for Commercial Buildings Farm 40OA-94
ENERGY EFFICIENCY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Florida Department of Community Affairs
FLA/COM-94 Version 2.1A
PROJECT NAME Steak IN Shake Restaurant__ PERMITTING OFFICE:
ADDRESS: Seminole Towne Center Sanford Sanford
Florida ........... CLIMATE ZONE: 5 __
OWNER: Stead: IN Shake Corporation_ PERMIT NO: _ 35011 g
AGENT: JURISDICTION NO: 691500
BUILDING TYPE: Restaurant ? 100 Peep
CONSTRUCTION CONDITION: New construct
DESIGN COMPLETION: _Finished Building
CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA: _3391________
MAX. TONNAGE OF EQUIPMENT PER SYSTEM:
COMPLIANCE CALCULATION:
METHOD A
A. WHOLE BUILDING
PRESCRIPTIVE REQUIREMENTS:
LIGHTING
le
ion
NUMBER OF ZONES: 1
34
DESIGN CRITERIA RESULT
51 . 18 100.00 PASSES
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 150.00 175.00 PASSES
LIGHTING CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PASSES
HVAC EQUIPMENT'
COOLING EQUIPMENT
1. EER 8.90 8.54 PASSES
IPLV 9.45 7.50 PASSES
HEATING EQUIPMENT
1. Et 1.00 N/A
AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INSULATION LEVEL
1. With Insulated Roof 6.00 6.00 PASSES
WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
1. EF 3.00 0.77 PASSES
PIPING INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
1. Non -Circulating w/o H 1.00 1.00 PASSES
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION:
I hereby certify that the plans and
specifications covered by this calcu-
lation are in compliance with the
Florida Energy
VON
Cede.
PREPARED BY: VON Axn-
DATE:----zZVO K
I hereby certify that this building is
in complianMwiFlorida Energy
Efficiency
OWNER/AGENT•
DATE.--------------
Review of the plans and specifica-
tions covered by this calculation
indicates compliance with the
Florida Energy Efficiency Code.
Before construction is completed,
this building will be inspected
for compliance in accordance with
Section 553. 908, Fly r ' da Statutes
BUILDING OFF0-- L-•/_ ij1 pJ
Statutes
DATE: 5/ _mil_
I hereby certify(*) that the system desiian is in compliance with the Florida
Energy Efficiency Cade.
SYSTEM DESIGNER REGISTRATION/STATE
ARCHITECT :
MECHANICAL: _A LBER T_F_A/VE /36 /4 FL oR I DA________
PLUMBING
ELECTRICAL•
LIGHTING
Signature is required where Florida :law requires design to be performed
by registered design professionals. Typed names and registration numbers may
be used where all relevant information is contained can signed/sealed plans.
BUILDING INFORMATION COMPLIANCE
CHECK
401------- GLAZING --ZONE 1------------------------------------------------ v-
Elevation Type U Sc VLT Shading Area(Sgft):
East Commercial 0.55 0.71 0.6 Continuous Ove 200:
South Commercial 0.55 0.71 0.6 Continuous Ove 204:
West Commercial 0.55 0.71 0.6 Continuous Ove 47
Total Glass Area in Zone 1 = 451
Total Glass Area = 4511
402------- WALLS --ZONE 1------------------------------------------------ f---
Elevation Type U Added R Gross(Sgft):
North Frame, R-19, Finish. 0.05 0 640:
East Frame, R-19, Finish. 0.05 C) 12241
South Frame, R-15, Finish. 0.05 8241'
West Frame, R-19, Finish. 0.05 0 1056
Total Wall Area in Zone 1 = 37441
Total Gross Wall Area = 3744
403------- DOORS --ZONE 1------------------------------------------------ i---
Elevation Type U Area(Sgft)
North 1-3/4 Wood Door -Solid core flush 0.40 241
East 1-3/4 Wood Door -Solid core flush 0.40 34;
Total Door Area in Zone 1 = 47
Total Door Area = 47
404------- ROOFS --ZONE 1------------------------------------------------ i---
Type Color U Added R Area(Sgft) l
Memb,.75" Seathing, R-30 Medium 0.03 0 3630
Total Roof f Area in Zone 1 = 36301
Total Roof Area = 3630:
405------- FLOORS -ZONE 1------------------------------------------------ f---
Type R Area(Sgft){
Slab on Grade/Uninsulated 0 3630:
Total Floor Area in Zone 1 = 3630
Total Floor Area = 3630
406.------INFILTRATION -------------------------------------------------- 1---
CHECK
Infiltration Criteria in 406.1.ABC.1 have been met. v 1
407------- COOLING SYSTEMS ----------------------------------------------- : ---
Type No Efficiency IPLV Tens!
1. Air Cooled ( '= 65,000 Btu/h 4 8.9 9.45 33.78.'
408------- HEATING SYSTEMS ----------------------------------------------- : ---
Type No Efficiency BTU/hr:
i
1. Electric Resistance 4 1.00 163824:
405------- VENTILATION --------------------------------------------------- :---
CHECK:
Ventilation Criteria in 409.1.ABC.1 have been met. v 1
410------ AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ---------------------------------------- 1---
AHU Type Duct Location R-value:
1. Packaged Constant Volume With Insulated Roof 6.0!
411------ PUMPS AND PIPING -ZONE 1---------------------------------------:---
Type R-value/in Diameter Thickness;
1. Non -Circulating w/o Heat 4 1.25 1
412------ WATER HEATING SYSTEMS -ZONE 1----------------------------------;---
Type Efficiency StandbyLoss InputRate Gallons;
1. <; =12 kW 3.0 0.02 3.7 120 :
413------ ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION --•-------------------------------- ;
CHECK
Metering criteria in 413.1.ABC.1 have been met. ; li ;
Transformer criteria in 413.1.ABC.2 have been met. ; (j ;
414.-----MOTORS----------------------------------------------------;---- ---
Motor efficiencies in 414.1.ABC.1 have been met. ; !/
415.-----LIGHTING SYSTEMS -ZONE 1 ---------------------------------------
Space Type No Control Type i No Control Type 2 No Watts Area(Sgft)
Leisure Di 1 On/Off 6 0 6102 3391
Total Watts for Zone i = 6102:
Total Area for Zone 1 = 3391:
Total Watts = 6102:
Total Area = 3391
CHECK
Lighting criteria in 415.1.ABC have been met.
16. HVAC load sizing has been performed. (407.1.ABC.1) ; v
17. Duct sizing and design have been performed. (410.1.ABC.1.2) ; v ;
18. Testing and balancing will be performed. (410.1.ABC.4j
19. Operation/maintenance manual will be provided to owner. (102. 1) ; !/
S T C A K l /v s- H,91 E 7/7/ 95
DESIGN DATA FOR SANFORD
LATITUDE : 28
ELEVATION (FEET) 89
WINTER DESIGN TEMP 35
SUMMER DESIGN DP : 94
SUMMER DESIGN WEB : 76
DAILY RANGE : 17
STEAK. IN SHADE DINING
07 -07 -1 SS5
SANFORD FLORIDA LAT 28 ALT = 89
CONST= 70W/40R/ 70B ID= 76/52 72
WALL COLOR: MEDIUM ROOF COLOR: MEDIUM
60515841.6
D.B.TEMP TOTAL TONS RSH TONS C.F.M.
1. JUN AT 9 A.M. 82. 2 11.84 5.69 2,955
2. JUL AT 9 A.M. 83. 2 11.96 5.79 3,006
3. OCT AT to A.M. 79. 8 10.72 5.78 3, 000
4. DEC AT 2 P.M. 79.8 10.40 6.06 3,148
5. SEP AT 3 P.M. 92.0 12.49 5.69 2,958
6. AUG AT 4 P.M. 93. 0 13.11 5.82 3, o2l
7. JUN AT 4 P.M. 93. 0 12.84 5.59 2,905
ZONE HEATING--:: 14,764 W/INFIL= 14,764 C.F.M 746
INPUTS
CEILING PARTITION
TRANSMISSION FACT. 0.00 0.00
TEMP DIFF HEATING 0 0
TEMP DIFF COOLING 0 0
FLOURESCENT LIGHTS - N SOLAR FACTOR
OVERHANGS AND/OR REVEALS
HEIGHT OF OVERHANG
DEPTH OF OVERHANG
HEIGHT OF WINDOW
DEPTH OF REVEAL
NUMBER FLOORS
TYPE 1
1.0 i
3. 00
5. 50
0. 00
1.00
EFFECTIVE AVERAGES FOR ZONE LOAD
EXPOSURE: N. NE E.
WALL TRANS. FACTORS 0.00 0.00 0.05
GLASS TRANS FACTORS 0.00 0.00 0.55
GLASS SOLAR FACTORS 0.00 0.00 0.63
ROOF TRANS. FACTOR = 0.03 Sk;YL I
NUMBER OF PEOPLE _
TOTAL LIGHTS =
OTHER ELECTRICAL =
E. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
S. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
W. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
W. TYPE 1SHADE AREA =
TOTAL GLASS AREA =
TOTAL GLASS AREA =
SKYLIGHT AREA =
SKYLIGHT AREA =
FLOOR SKYLIGHT
0 37
0 17
SKYLIGHT 0.00
PRESENT FT)
TYPE 2 TYPE 3
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0. 00
1.00 1.00
S OR OP -COST:
SE S. SW W. NW
0.00 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00
O.Oo 0.55 0.00 0.55 0.00
0.00 0.63 0. 00, 0.63 0.00
3HT TRANS. FACTOR = 0.00
OUTPUTS
105 SENSIBLE PEOPLE LOAD = 29,400
2,370 LIGHTING LOAD = 8,089
0 OTHER ELECTRICAL = 0
200 E. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 3,295
204 S. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 2,942
27 W. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 1,951
4 W. TYPE 1 SHADE SOLAR = 32
431 TOTAL GLASS SOLAR = 8,220
431 TOTAL GLASS TRANS. = 4,030
0 TOTAL SKYLIGHT SOLAR = 0
0 TOTAL SKYLIGHT TRANS = 0
E. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 512 E. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 433
S. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 524 S. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 588
W. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 101 W. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 121
TOTAL WALL AREA = 1,137 TOTAL WALL TRANS. 1,142
PARTITION AREA = 0 TOTAL PART. TRANS 0
CEILING AREA = 0 TOTAL CEILING TRANS 0
FLOOR AREA = 0 TOTAL FLOOR TRANS Ci
AREA OF ROOF = 1,580 ROOF LOAD 1,762
SAFETY FACTOR = 3% SAFETY B.T.U.S 2,033
EVAP FAN H.P. _ 0.87 FAN HEAT GAIN - DT 2,653
MISC SENSIBLE = 15,116 MISC. SENSIBLE 15,116
VENTILATION CFM = 1,304 0. A.SENSIBLE LOAD 24,385
MISC. LATENT = 0 MISC. LATENT 0
NUMBER OF PEOPLE = 105 PEOPLE LATENT LOAD 26,350
VENTILATION CFM = 1,304 O.A. LATENT LOAD 32,122
TOTAL CFM-STDAIR = 3,021 TOTAL LATENT LOAD 60,472
ROOM SENSIBLE = 69,790 ROOM LAT. LOAD 28,350
STEAK IN SHAKE DINING
GRAND TOTAL LOAD = 157,300 BTU'S OR 13.11 TONS <:.--
LOAD RUN FOR # 6. AUG AT 4 P.M. -
AREA ( SO FT) = 1,580 SO. FT PER TON = 121
TOTAL CFM-STD AIR = 3,021 CFM PER SO FT = 1.91
HEATING LOAD
PARTITION LOAD CEILING LOAD = 0
VENTILATION LOAD = 53,073 ROOF HEATING LOAD = 1,754
FLOOR HEATING LOAD= 0 SKYLIGHT LOAD = 0
GLASS HEATING LOAD= 8,771 WALL HEATING LOAD = 2,103
SLAB HEATING LOAD =2,136 INFIL HEAT LOAD = 0
WARM UP LOAD = 0 H LOAD WITH VENT = 67,837
COIL SELECTION PARAMETERS
DB TEMP ENT/LVG = 83.3 54.2 TOT SENSIBLE LOAD = 36,82B
WB TEMP ENT/LVG = 69.9 53.4 TOTAL COIL LOAD = 157,300
SPECIFIED ROOM RH = 52% RESULTING ROOM RH = 54%
TERM AIR TEMP = 55.00 90 DEGREES ROTATED = 0
T. ST. EVAP FAN = 1.00 NON -CEILING RETURN
BLDG. 'U' FACTOR= 0.11 CARRIER DEFAULTS
STEAK IN SHAKE KITCHEN
ci 7 -07 -1995
SANFORD FLORIDA LAT 28 ALT = 89
CONST= 70W/40R/ 70B ID= 76/52 72
WALL COLOR: MEDIUM ROOF COLOR: MEDIUM
60515841.6
D.B.TEMP TOTAL TONS RSH TONS C.F.M.
1. JUN AT 9 A.M. 82.2 11.66 5.66 2,942
2. JUL AT 9 A.M. 83.2 11.68 5.68 2,950
3. OCT AT 10 A.M. 79. 8 10.23 5.5E 2,888
4. DEC AT 2 P.M. 79. 8 9.51 5.55 2,881
5. SEP AT 3 P.M. 92.0 12.60 5.88 3,053
G. AUG AT 4 P.M. 93. 0 13.24 6.00 3,115
7. JUN AT 4 P.M. 92. 0 131.23 5.99 3,109
ZONE HEATING--' 10,046 W/ INFI L = 10, 04G C.F. M 507
INPUTS
CEILING PARTITION
TRANSMISSION FACT. (--).00 0.00
TEMP DIFF HEATING 0 0
TEMP DIFF COOLING C) 0
FLOURESCENT LIGHTS - Y SOLAR FACTOR
OVERHANGS AND/OR REVEALS
HEIGHT OF OVERHANG
DEPTH OF OVERHANG
HEIGHT OF WINDOW
DEPTH OF REVEAL
NUMBER FLOORS
TYPE 1
1.0
3.00
5. 50
0. 00
1.00
FLOOR SKYLIGHT
i)i) 0. oo
0 37
0 17
SKYLIGHT 0.00
PRESENT FT)
TYPE 2 TYPE 3
0. 00 0.00
0. 00 0. 00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
1.00 1.00
EFFECTIVE AVERAGES FOR ZONE LOADS OR OP -COST:
EXPOSURE: N. NE E. SE S. SW W. NW
WALL TRANS. FACTORS 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00
GLASS TRANS FACTORS 0.55 o. c_ 0 0.55 0.00 o. 00 0.00 0. 55 0. o0
GLASS SOLAR FACTORS 0.63 0.00 0.63 0.00 O.Oo 0.00, 0.63 0.00
ROOF TRANS. FACTOR = 0.03 SKYLIGHT TRANS. FACTOR = 0.00
NUMBER OF PEOPLE _
TOTAL LIGHTS =
OTHER ELECTRICAL =
N. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
E. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
W. TYPE 1 GLASS AREA=
W. TYPE 1SHADE AREA =
TOTAL GLASS AREA =
TOTAL GLASS AREA =
SKYLIGHT AREA =
SKYLIGHT AREA =
OUTPUTS
16 SENSIBLE PEOPLE LOAD = 4,48o
2,717 LIGHTING LOAD = 11,589
0 OTHER ELECTRICAL = i
24 N. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 176
24 E. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 395
20 W. TYPE 1 GLASS SOLAR = 1,445
3 W. TYPE 1 SHADE SOLAR = 24
68 TOTAL GLASS SOLAR = 2,040
68 TOTAL GLASS TRANS. = 636
0 TOTAL SKYLIGHT SOLAR = 0
0 TOTAL SKYLIGHT TRANS = 0
N. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 616 N. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 400
E. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 488 E. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 413
S. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 96 S. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 108
W. TYPE 1 WALL AREA = 908 W. TYPE 1 WALL LOAD 1,089
TOTAL WALL AREA = 108 TOTAL WALL TRANS. 2,010
PARTITION AREA = 0 TOTAL PART. TRANS C)
CEILING AREA = 0 TOTAL CEILING TRANS 0
FLOOR AREA = C-) TOTAL FLOOR TRANS 0
AREA OF ROOF = 1,811 ROOF LOAD 3,019
SAFETY FACTOR = 3% SAFETY B.T.U.S 2,096
EVAP FAN H.P. = 0.89 FAN HEAT GAIN - DT 3,735
MISC SENSIBLE = 47,o,95 MISC. SENSIBLE 47,095
VENTILATION CFM = 1,392 0. A.SENSIBLE LOAD 26,030
MISC. LATENT = 15,250 MISC. LATENT 15,250
NUMBER OF PEOPLE = 16 PEOPLE LATENT LOAD 4,320
VENTILATION CFM = 1,392 O.A. LATENT LOAD 38,637
TOTAL CFM-STDAIR = 3,115 TOTAL LATENT LOAD 58,207
ROOM SENSIBLE = 71,965 ROOM LAT. LOAD 19,570
STEAK. IN SHAKE KITCHEN
GRAND TOTAL LOAD = 158,937 BTU'S OR 13.24 TONS ;--
LOAD RUN FOR # 6. AUG AT 4 P.M.
AREA (SO FT) = 1,811 SCE. FT PER TON = 137
TOTAL CFM-STD AIR = 3,115 CFM PER SLR FT = 1.72
HEATING LOAD
PARTITION LOAD = 0 CEILING LOAD = C)
VENTILATION LOAD = 56,654 ROOF HEATING LOAD = 2,010
FLOOR HEATING LOAD= 0 SKYLIGHT LOAD = 0
GLASS HEATING LOAD= 1,384 WALL HEATING LOAD = 3,900
SLAB HEATING LOAD = 2,752 INFIL HEAT LOAD = 0
WARM UP LOAD = 0 H LOAD WITH VENT = 66,700
COIL SELECTION PARAMETERS
DB TEMP ENT/LVG = 83.6 54.2 TOT SENSIBLE LOAD = 100,73o
WB TEMP ENT/LVG = 69.6 53.3 TOTAL COIL LOAD = 158,937
SPECIFIED ROOM RH = 52% RESULTING ROOM RH = 50%
TERM AIR TEMP = 55.00 90 DEGREES ROTATED = 0
T. ST. EVAP FAN = 1.00 NON -CEILING RETURN
BLDG. 'U' FACTOR= 0.05 CARRIER DEFAULTS
N
CITY OF SANFORD, FLORIDA
APPLICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT
Lit)
fv i
PERMIT ADDRESS Se Towne center c1 r'cle PERMIT NUMBER
Total Contract Price of Job A3091000 moftl Total Sq. Ft. 30 630Sr
Describe work AleAq eonbtruetron 7Cpr et S K&At In ShaJc4 K ara.rit
Type of. Construction %G $ unD #Ttecred Flood Prone (YES)
Number of Stories pyE Number of Dwellings NA Zoning P /)
Occupancy: Residential ,y4 Commercial A — 2 Industrial ,yq
LEGAL DESCRIPTION (please attach printout from Seminole County)
TAX I.D. NUMBER 29-/9- 3o— ri•Lk/— 060o — 000a
OWNER
ADDRESS
LOnse/"drtted AbdUC13 /6teaA'nSltaktTilc.
SDD Cthfu/'y Build i 1 36 S. fej*nSy/ya,7ni;
PHONE NUMBER (og3-y/06
CITY rmdiit,4ARo1i.S STATE rn/ ZIP l/ 6u f
TITLE HOLDER
ADDRESS
CITY
IF OTHER THAN OWNER) SAMgr /,s LiwAIE2 6i1Le OE-uo44
BONDING COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY
ARCHITECT BE
ADDRESS 5/o
04
STATE
STATE
CITY-rnd1'&A&P0/i5 STATE
MORTGAGE
ADDRESS
CITY
LENDER
STATE
ZIP
ZIP
ZIP 5162Z7
ZIP
CONTRACTOR vI--,I/J ' PHONE NUMBER Oi4
ADDRESS lor 2nn 11 -f j4o ST. LICENSE NUMBER (o
CITY /A i II Y.41 u STATE 7 i ZIP ':?,;7- (v
Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as
indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance
of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating
construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured
for ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, SIGNS, POOLS, ETC.
OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the f.orecloing information is accurate and that
all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction
and zoning. A COPY OF THE RECORDED COPY OF THE; NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT WILL BE POSTED
ON THE JOB SITE WITH PERMITS NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7) DAYS AFTER THE PERMIT HAS BEEN
ISSUED. FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOU PAYING TWICE FOR
THE IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH
YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT.
NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this: permit, there may be additional
restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of
this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental
entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies.
ACCEPTANCE OF P RMIT IS
THE REQUIRE N. / FLO
VERIFICATION THAT I WILL NOTIFY THE OWNER OF THE PROPERTY OF
u^F A INN LAW, FS713.
f•** ********************************** 13 '0z
co 0
UGti7 Zj m o
Owner/Agent & Dat Sienature of Contractor & Date 0
VZ4of E. E s_sG lBEN z
Type or Pr nt Owner/Agent Name Typ Print Con a is Name o x 3
J3-
7
0
D
ro
n
Notary & DateiaureofNotary & Date Signature
rt
nyi CASTO MARY L. SE I
MY COMMISSION 8 CC: 36 : g ' "yap': A4Y COMMISSION B CC 470040
EXPIRES: May 16. 1998 plplpES: August 4, 'IN9 0
BmM Thru Nmjy Pubk Underarlters .
r,.
a ` Thru Notary PuI)BC U05-'"t-
ro
Application Ape/t ved BY: Date: /"`,-'
FEES: Building ( Radon PolicJA Fire -60
Open Space Road Impact pli
ationPERMITVALIDATION: CHECK CASH DATE_ BY
ORIGINAL (BUILDING) YELLOW (CUSTOMER) PINK (COUNTY TAX OFFICE) GOLD (CO. ADMIN)
THIS APPLICATION USED FOR WORK VALUED $2500.00 OR MORE
June 21, 1995
To Whom It May Concern:
A Consolidated Products Company
Ste'M.
h.nShake"` Inc. 500
Century Building 36
South Pennsylvania Street Indianapolis,
IN 46204 317)
633-4100 This
letter shall serve as official authorization for any representative of Interplan Practice,
Ltd., to act as our agent and to make permit application on our behalf for the
project listed below: Seminole
Towne Center Lot
LL-04 Sanford,
Florida Corporate
Seal STATE
OF INDIANA SS:
COUNTY
OF MARION Authorized
Representative: STEAK
N SHAKE, INC. Cheryl
J. Wendling Corporate
Secretary By:
Before
me, the undersigned, a Notary:Public in and for said County and State, this
21th day of June, 1995, personally appeared Cheryl J. Wendling, Corporate Secretary
of Steak n Shake, Inc., an Indiana corporation, and acknowledge the execution
of foregoing document. tary
Public My
Commission Expires: County
of Residence: o-
r
arc 29-19-30-5LW-0600-0000
name SEMINOLE TOWNE CENTER LP
addl C/O MELVIN SIMON & ASSOC INC
add2 P 0 BOX 7033
csz INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46207
pad
CURRENT 95 DELETED date 07/18/95
nbad 1.00 act own %
td dor flg -- pre/late -- -- exemptions --
52 10 0 -
jval land 897,860
agrc
extra feat
bldg
cost value 897,860
income
total just value 897,860
exmp-amt yr tax due
1900 20,482.98
e&i 1 50
LEGAL LEG TRACT 6 SEMINOLE TOWNE CENTER REPLAT
PB 47 PGS 8 THRU 10 INFO: DELETED NOW IN PB 49 PG 27
SALES
land 08 04/19/94
bldg 01/01/00
chg NOR 05/19/95
Note, Legal, Sale, Bld/land/xf, Amd10,H:ist,Other Tax Roll,Fwd,Main Menu, [EXIT]
FRM-40505:ORACLE error -- unable to perform query.
Count: *0 (
Replace>
LETTER OF TRANSAUTTAI. Interplan Practice Ltd.
ArchitecturelEngineeringlhtterior Design
AA-CO01302
933 Lee Road, I st Floor
Orlando, Florida 32810
Telephone 407.645-5008
Fax 407.629-9124
INTERPLAN
P R A C T I C E
CITY of SA-MGORD F//Z-C- DtPT 141390
To Project No.
301 Cewiw Arlo Drive 7.25.95
Date
anfDrd `L 3 Z77/ //AAJO Oe4MER
We are sending via
jelCHA-!ZA2 GOH6A/ V07 3 2 - Of(of
Attention Telephone
5AeA4e 'it 5hakc Sewino/G Towne 6e4Ye.,-
Project
A/a n feyiems/ Ju bmissl ;w
Subject
Date Description
dui/dii?9 Plans kb i% d)'rtern.tiona/ sift old. e%4la417or/
P.NGr4V P/ans .
Leh'w o/ &m SfW4 i7 Shake f0 "-f
a5 we.
Remarks 1f- IS In unAZt yotc w/7/ {arward Elie 4,faehtom/ e/
ano 710 JhG Bu/W-,4 &gegtrt"77eyrt kQbeot yoAer "tvics i'S co.,,v/efed. 5hou/
d you hgwe- any 9.yes756ns e,- 1-e9vive a.dd'f70ra./ in r,Ia ror,, L2le45e ,
qe/ free 71p een7`a.c21' ene . T %/ hw- hQe4y assist i• an y way
eossib/e . Thank.
you . A-
Mmte Add O renq- . Sftak Shake
DAV-LIN CONSTRUCTION CO., INC..
P.O. BOX 24748 JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32241
August 22, 1995
City of Sanford
Building and Zoning Department
P.O. Box 1788
Sanford, FL 32772
407) 330-5644
Re: Steak N Shake
Seminole Town Center
Sanford, F1
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:
904) 260.2461/FAX (904) 260-1492
Please accept this letter for Mr. Mark Emerson acting on my
behalf to pick and sign for any permits and/or any other
documents necessary for the above referenced project.
Thank you for your cooperation in this matter.
Sincerely,
Davi L. 7ecisVcePrey Florida
License # CGC034236 DLS:
ld Sworn
and described before me this
22 day of August 1995. 6l'
ii1 71 U" Print
Name: Leslie A. Deason Notary
Public, State of Florida Personally
Known X or Produced
Identification Type
of Identification Produced:_ My
commission expires: LESLIE
A. DEASON NOTARY
PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA My
commission expires June 28, 1998 Commission
No. CC 388447